JP2018183698A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of saving power consumption.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 includes light emission means such as a decorative symbol display device, a frame lamp group, and a board surface lamp group. If a player does not operate a handle 18, and, if a prescribed time has elapsed without a performance of a new display presentation since the moment when various display presentations were finished in the decorative symbol display device, a power saving state begins. When the power saving state is started, the display part of the decorative symbol display device becomes a less illuminating state, and the frame lamp group and the board surface lamp group become an unlit state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has many light emitting means such as a liquid crystal display device that performs a symbol variation display and an electric decoration device that includes a large number of light emitting elements such as LEDs in order to enhance the decoration effect and the production effect. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-102937 A

  However, a display device such as a pachinko machine or an illumination device is always lit and blinked so as to make the customer interested in the game even when the player is not playing the game. For this reason, the power consumption of the gaming machine has become a considerable amount, and power saving (saving of power consumption) has been desired.

  In recent years, there has been a risk that the above-described problems may become more conspicuous due to an increase in the number of installed light emitting elements, an increase in luminance, an increase in the size of a liquid crystal screen, or the like.

  However, simply reducing the number of installed light-emitting elements or changing the light-emitting elements to ones with low brightness will reduce the decoration and production effects of light, making it inferior to other types of gaming machines. There is also a risk that it may be lost or gameability may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of saving power consumption.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
At least one light emitting means;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a power saving means for setting the light emitting means to a power saving state in which the light emitting means is dimmed or extinguished,
The gist of the invention is that the power saving state includes return means for ending the power saving state and returning to the normal state when a predetermined return condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is an excellent effect that power consumption can be saved.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a back perspective view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows an electric structure. It is a rear view of the game board which shows the state by which various cable connectors were wired. It is a back perspective view of a game board showing the state where various cable connectors were wired. (A) is a schematic plan view of the volume power saving changeover switch, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the scale value of the volume power saving changeover switch, the volume level, and the power saving level. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd opportunity corresponding | compatible opening passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing which shows various table structures. It is a flowchart which shows a variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an opportunity corresponding | compatible opening / closing control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decoration design. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of an off symbol counter. It is explanatory drawing which shows a table structure. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the aspect of the display part in the normal time, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the aspect of the display part at the time of power saving. It is a flowchart which shows the switching process which concerns on the display part of a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the switching process which concerns on a lamp group. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a shutter accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a shutter accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a shutter accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a shutter accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a shutter accessory.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. However, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories placed on the surface of the game board 30, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. ing. The outer frame 11 is formed in a rectangular shape as a whole by, for example, a wooden plate material, and each plate material is assembled by a detachable fastener such as a small screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are provided on the left side of the outer frame 11. The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so as to be rotatable, thereby supporting the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. For convenience, although not shown, a pair of upper and lower receiving brackets to which a locking member of a locking device 600 described later is locked are attached to the right side portion of the outer frame 11. Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 85 is attached to the lower part of the outer frame 11.

  The opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. Yes. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a blue resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  On the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball receiving tray is provided at the center of the lower portion thereof, so that game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

  A game ball launching handle (hereinafter simply referred to as a handle) 18 projecting toward the front side is provided on the right side of the lower plate 15, and an ashtray 26 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15. The handle 18 includes a touch sensor 451 as a touch detection unit that detects contact of the player, a variable resistor 445 as an operation amount detection unit for detecting an operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18, and a game A stop switch 455 for stopping the launch of the sphere is provided (see FIG. 8).

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as launching device) 70 while aligning them in a row. The game ball overflowing from the upper plate 19 is guided to the lower plate 15.

  The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with a bill or a card inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, according to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lending to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine.

  In addition, an effect button 125 is provided in front of the upper plate 19, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect is performed on a decorative symbol display device 42, which will be described later, or the contents of the effect are changed. Or

  In addition, an electric decoration device such as various lamps is provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These lighting devices play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode according to the change of the game state mainly at the time of big hit or at the time of predetermined reach.

  For example, a side lamp 102 is provided on the periphery of the window 101, a top lamp 103 is provided in the upper center, and a corner lamp 104 is provided in the left and right upper corners. Each of the lamps 102 to 104 incorporates a light emitting source such as an LED, a control board for driving the LED, and the like.

  Among these, the top lamp 103 functions as a jackpot lamp, and lights and blinks at the time of jackpot to notify that the jackpot is being hit. The corner lamp 104 functions as an error display lamp and lights up when a predetermined error occurs.

  Hereinafter, the side lamp 102, the top lamp 103, and the corner lamp 104 are collectively referred to as a frame lamp group LG1 unless otherwise mentioned.

  A speaker SP (see FIG. 8) is provided adjacent to each corner lamp 104, and a speaker cover 24 is attached to the front side of the speaker SP.

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached to the front and back of the glass unit 137, but is attached in a round shape as a whole and assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame and the game board.

  As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached in a state in which the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

  Further, a bulging portion 40 bulging rearward is formed at a lower portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window hole 39 (game board 30). A launching device 70 is attached to the front right side of the bulging portion 40. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is adopted as the firing device 70. Further, the bulging portion 40 is provided with a ball passage 71 that leads from a later-described payout mechanism portion 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15. Further, there is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 70a of the launching device 70 and a rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52) described later, and a foul ball passage 72 is formed below this gap. As a result, if the game ball launched from the launching device 70 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 described later and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 and the ball passage 71. It is discharged to the lower tray 15 via A harness cover 74 is provided below the ball passage 71. Thereby, a harness (not shown) for connecting the relay substrate 75 and the launching device 70 is gathered.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 700 exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and the inner frame 12 can be unlocked by inserting a key into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotating it to one side. The front frame set 14 and the back pack unit 203 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 and the back pack unit 203 are locked to the inner frame 12.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a first opportunity corresponding port (operating port) 33, a second opportunity corresponding port 34, a variable display unit 35, and the like in a through hole formed by router processing. The game board 30 is attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, and the first opportunity corresponding opening 33, the upper plate 19 (or the A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the lower plate 15). In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not won a prize in various winning units (general winning port 31, variable winning device 32, first opportunity corresponding port 33) as a means for entering a ball. Is discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills (servants).

  Then, a jackpot lottery is performed when a game ball enters the first opportunity corresponding port 33, and when a winning result is obtained by the jackpot lottery, a jackpot state as a special gaming state occurs.

  Further, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is provided with a pair of opening and closing members, and the opening and closing members are configured to open and close in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition. Thereby, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 can be switched between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. The first opportunity corresponding port 33 is, for example, when the opening / closing member is in an open state in the normal mode and a specified time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed, or when a specified number (for example, 1) of game balls have entered. It will be closed. This opening / closing process is performed only once in the normal mode.

  The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that variably displays with the passage of the second opportunity corresponding port 34 as a trigger, a special display device 43 that variably displays with a winning at the first opportunity corresponding port 33 as a trigger, A decorative symbol display device 42 is provided as a variable display device that performs variable display in accordance with the variable display by the special display device 43.

  The normal symbol display device 41 incorporates a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs), and the lighting display mode is switched and displayed (variable display) every time the game ball passes through the second opportunity corresponding port 34. Specifically, “O” or “X” can be lit and displayed as a normal symbol, and for example, the normal symbol is changed from “O” to “X” every time the game ball passes through the second opportunity corresponding port 34. → "○" → ... The display is changed at high speed (variable display), and the first opportunity corresponding port 33 (opening / closing member) is displayed when the change display stops for several seconds with the "○" symbol (winning symbol) Is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the second opportunity corresponding port 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for that time is the fluctuation display being performed at that time. It is the structure performed after the end of. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 44. Yes.

  The special display device 43 includes a plurality of light emitting units provided on the side of the normal symbol display device 41. Specifically, it is composed of three-color light-emitting diodes (three-color LEDs) having red, green, and blue emission colors, and the color of the light-emitting portion is switched each time the game ball passes through the first opportunity corresponding port 33. (Variable display). Then, whether or not it is a big hit is definitely displayed by the color of the light emitting section that is lit when the variable display is stopped. The display content of the special display device 43 is also directly controlled by the main control device 261.

  Further, when a game ball is newly won in the first opportunity corresponding port 33 during the variable display of the special display device 43, the corresponding variable display is performed after the end of the variable display at that time. It has a configuration. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 46. Yes. In addition, when a new game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding port 33 during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 560 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, auxiliary display content is displayed by the sub control device 560 based on a command (command signal) from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the special display device 43. Is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 described later.

  In the display part 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, three symbol display areas, upper, middle and lower, are set. A plurality of symbols are scrolled and displayed in each symbol display area, and then stopped and displayed in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area.

  The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and is in an open state in which a game ball is likely to win in the case of a big hit (occurrence of a special game state).

  More specifically, when a game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding port 33, the special display device 43 displays the three-color LED at a high speed, such as red → green → blue → red →. When a predetermined time elapses, it is determined and displayed in one of the colors. High-speed color change display means, for example, that red, green, and blue are displayed in order every 4 msec. At this time, a special gaming state occurs when the decision display is made in red or green (for example, when it is stopped for a few seconds), that is, when a big win lottery is won. Here, red or green is a display showing a big hit. In particular, red is a display indicating that the game mode after the jackpot ends is a high probability mode described later, and green is a display indicating that the game mode after the jackpot ends is a time reduction mode described later. For this reason, when the special display device 43 determines and displays the three-color LEDs in red or green, a combination of specific symbols is supplementarily displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. The large winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is in a predetermined open state, and the game ball is configured to be in a state where it is easy to win a prize (a big hit state). More specifically, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is regarded as one round (special prize state), and the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Is done.

  Further, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 for guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 70 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game balls launched in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the rails 50 into the game area formed on the game board surface. The rail 50 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51. This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the upper part of the game board 30 returns to the rail 50 again.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right part of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right part of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, the parallel part of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 is excluded.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an electric decoration device such as various lamps. These lighting devices play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode according to the change of the game state mainly at the time of big hit or at the time of predetermined reach.

  For example, a center lamp 57 is provided on the periphery of the center frame 47, and side lamps 58 and 59 are provided on the left and right lower portions of the game board 30 (game area). Each of the lamps 57 to 59 incorporates a light emitting source such as an LED, a control board for driving the LED, and the like.

  Hereinafter, the center lamp 57 and the side lamps 58 and 59 are collectively referred to as a panel lamp group LG2 unless otherwise mentioned.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a rear view showing the configuration of the game board, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view thereof. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine.

  Various control boards are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up and down and left and right and partially overlapped in the front and back. Furthermore, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls, a protective cover made of resin, and the like are attached. In this embodiment, various control boards are divided into two mounting bases to form two control board units, and these control board units are individually attached to the inner frame 12 or the back of the game board 30. Yes. In this case, only the main board as the main control board is mounted on one mounting base to form a unit, and the dispensing control board, launch control board and power supply board are mounted on the other mounting base to form a unit. Here, for convenience, the former unit is referred to as “first control board unit 201”, and the latter unit is referred to as “second control board unit 202”. In addition, since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”. The detailed configuration of each unit 201 to 203 will be described later. The first control board unit 201, the second control board unit 202, and the back pack unit 203 are configured to be detachable in units, and further, a support shaft is provided in part to provide the inner frame 12 or game board. 30 is configured to be openable and closable with respect to the back surface.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As described above, the variable display device unit 35 is disposed in the center of the game board 30 with respect to the through hole formed by router processing.

  A resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided at the rear of the variable display device unit 35 so as to protrude rearward. However, in the present embodiment, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30 and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30 so that the variable display device unit 35 is integrated. ing. A decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device and a display control device 45 are attached to the rear end of the frame cover 213 in a state where they are overlapped and integrated (unitized). Further, a sub-control device 560 is attached to the back side of the display control device 45.

  The display control device 45 includes a display control board 650 (see FIG. 8) on which various electronic components are mounted. The display control board 650 is configured to be accommodated in a board box 651 made of a transparent resin material or the like. Yes.

  A terminal portion window 660 for exposing terminal portions (substrate side connectors) 658 and 659 provided on the display control substrate 650 to the outside is formed on the back surface portion of the substrate box 651. Via this terminal portion window 660, connectors of cable connectors C2 and C4, which will be described later, can be inserted and removed from the outside of the display control device 45 to the terminal portions 658 and 659 of the display control board 650.

  Various electronic components such as a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, and a VDP 526, which will be described later, are mounted on the display control board 650. In addition, the display control board 650 is electrically connected to the decorative design display device (liquid crystal display) 42 through a cable connector (not shown) via the output port 529.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control device 560 is placed on the back surface of the substrate box 651.

  As will be described later, the sub control device 560 stores a CPU that controls various effects according to instructions from the main control device 261 (main board 262), a ROM that stores various programs, and necessary data according to the progress of the game. Sub-control board 561 including a RAM, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. (see FIG. 8) The sub-control board 561 is configured to be accommodated in a board box 562 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

  A sub relay board 570 (see FIG. 8) is mounted on the back side of the board box 562, and power supplied from a power board 313a described later is connected to the sub control device 560 and the sub control board 560 via the sub relay board 570. It is supplied to the display control device 45.

  More specifically, the sub-relay board 570 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) 571, 572, and 573 for connecting connectors of various cable connectors described later along the left-right direction. Each of the terminal portions 571 to 573 is formed to protrude from the sub relay board 570. Correspondingly, a concave portion (retraction portion) 574 is formed in the lower portion of the substrate box 562 of the sub-control device 560. The terminal portions 571, 572, and 573 are exposed to the outside of the substrate box 562 through the holes opened in the concave portion 574.

  As shown in FIGS. 7, 9, and 10, a power supply cable connector C <b> 1 is connected to the terminal portion 571. The other end of the cable connector C1 is connected to a terminal portion (board-side connector) 590 of the power supply device 313. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the game board 30 showing a state in which various cable connectors are wired, and FIG. 10 is a perspective view thereof. 5 and 6 and the like, the illustration of each cable connector is omitted for the sake of convenience, and the main cable connectors C1 to C10 are shown only in FIGS. 7, 9, and 10, but of course, the pachinko machine 10 In addition to this, many cable connectors are wired.

  A cable connector C2 for supplying power is connected to the terminal portion 572. The other end of the cable connector C2 is connected to a terminal portion 659 of the display control device 45. That is, power is supplied to the display control device 45 via the sub relay board 570.

  A cable connector C3 for command signals (command signals) is connected to the terminal portion 573. The other end of the cable connector C3 is connected to the terminal portion 702 of the main controller 261.

  In addition, a connector (not shown) serving as an insertion portion protrudes upward from the upper edge portion of the sub-relay board 570, and the corresponding lower edge portion of the sub-control board 561 is connected to the connector. A connector (not shown) that serves as an insertion port is provided so as to face downward. When the sub control board 561 and the sub relay board 570 are mounted on the board box 562, the connector on the sub relay board 570 side is inserted into the connector on the sub control board 561 side, so that both are electrically connected. . These connectors are for power supply and for command signals (command signals). That is, a command (command signal) is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 560 via the sub relay board 570.

  Note that the normal symbol display device 41 and the special display device 43 are also electrically connected to the sub-relay board 570 (see FIG. 8). The main control device 261 outputs a control signal and the like to the normal symbol display device 41 and the special display device 43 via the cable connector C3, that is, the sub relay board 570. Therefore, the normal symbol display device 41 and the special display device 43 are directly controlled by the main control device 261 without using the sub control board 561.

  On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 560 (sub-control board 561). More specifically, a terminal portion (board-side connector) 579 for a command signal (command signal) is provided in the vicinity of the upper right end portion of the sub-control board 561. Correspondingly, an opening 580 is formed in the vicinity of the upper right end portion of the substrate box 562 of the sub-control device 560, and the terminal portion 579 is exposed to the outside of the substrate box 562 through the opening 580. A cable connector C4 for command signal (command signal) is connected to the terminal portion 579 (see FIG. 9 and the like). The terminal portion 658 of the display control device 45 is connected to the other end of the cable connector C4. As can be seen from FIG. 9 and the like, in this embodiment, the terminal portion 579 of the sub-control device 560 and the terminal portion 658 of the display control device 45 are provided at relatively close positions, and the cable connector C4 is a relatively cable. The short one is used. This is to suppress illegal acts such as so-called “hanging”.

  Now, returning to the description of FIG. 5, a back frame set 215 is attached to the back surface of the game board 30 below the frame cover 213. The back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the first control board unit 201 and includes a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, although illustration is omitted.

  In the second control board unit 202 located below the first control board unit 201, as shown in FIG. 7, a discharge passage portion 217 is formed at a position below the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215. A discharge chute 218 for discharging discharge balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed in the discharge passage portion 217. Accordingly, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 31 and the like are gathered via the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute 218 of the discharge passage portion 217. Similarly, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won any winning port is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute 218.

  Further, a detection switch or the like as a ball entry detection means for detecting the passage of game balls such as various winning holes is provided on the back surface of the game board 30. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning port switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning port 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. The count switch 223 is a switch that counts the game balls won in the variable winning device 32. Further, a first opportunity corresponding port (starting port) switch 224 is provided at a position corresponding to the first opportunity corresponding port 33, and a second opportunity corresponding port (gate) switch is provided at a position corresponding to the second opportunity corresponding port 34. 225 is provided.

  The winning port switch 221, the count switch 223, the first opportunity corresponding port switch 224, and the second opportunity corresponding port switch 225 are connected to a first board surface relay board (not shown) via a cable connector. It is connected to a main board 262 (main control device 261) described later via a cable connector C6 (see FIG. 9 and the like).

  Although not shown in the drawings, the variable winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid as a driving means for opening the large winning opening, and the first opportunity corresponding opening 33 is used to open the electric accessory. A first opportunity corresponding port (starting port) solenoid is provided as a driving means. The large winning opening solenoid and the first opportunity corresponding opening (starting opening) solenoid are connected to a second board relay board (not shown) via a cable connector, and this second board relay board is also connected to the main board via the cable connector C7. 262 (see FIG. 9 and the like).

  The detection results detected by the detection switches are taken into a main board 262 (main control device 261), which will be described later, and a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation each time from the main board 262. Is transmitted to the payout control board 311a (see FIG. 8). Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control board 311a. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball is electrically sensed for each of the various winning openings, and the payout is immediately performed.

  The main control device 261 provided in the first control board unit 201 includes a CPU that performs main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, and communication with various devices. And a main board 262 (see FIG. 8) including a random number generator used for various lotteries, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and the like. A substrate 262 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

  The board box 263 includes a box base 265 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover 266 that covers the box base 265 (see FIG. 6 and the like).

  Further, the box base 265 and the box cover 266 are connected by left and right sealing units 264A and 264B. When the substrate box 263 is opened, a predetermined trace is left in the sealing units 264A and 264B. ing. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened. Sealing units in the present embodiment are configured by the sealing units 264A and 264B.

  As long as the sealing units 264A and 264B are configured to connect the box base 265 and the box cover 266 so that they cannot be opened, in the present embodiment, the sealing unit 264A on the left side is connected to three sealing members. The right sealing unit 264B has a configuration in which two sealing members are connected. The box base 265 and the box cover 266 are connected to each other so that they cannot be opened by inserting locking claws into the long holes of the sealing members. Sealing processing by the sealing units 264A, 264B prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed, Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening / sealing process again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into the long hole of at least one sealing member among the three or two sealing members constituting the sealing units 264A and 264B. And when opening the board | substrate box 263 by the malfunction of the accommodated main board | substrate 262 etc., the connection of the sealing member in which the latching claw was inserted, and another sealing member is cut | disconnected. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing members. If the history of opening the board box 263 is left in the board box 263, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 263.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) 701, 702, 703, 704 for connecting connectors of various cable connectors are provided in the vicinity of the upper edge portion of the main board 262. It is arranged along the left-right direction. Each of the terminal portions 701 to 704 protrudes from the main substrate 262 and is exposed to the outside of the substrate box 263 through a hole opening in a recess (retractable portion) 266a formed in the upper portion of the box cover 266. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, a cable connector C <b> 5 connected to the launch control device 312 is connected to the terminal portion 701. A cable connector C3 connected to the sub relay board 570 is connected to the terminal portion 702. Connected to the terminal portion 703 is a cable connector C6 connected to the first board surface relay board that performs a relay function with the prize opening switch 221 and the like. Connected to the terminal portion 704 is a cable connector C7 connected to the second board surface relay board that performs a relay function with a prize winning solenoid or a first opportunity corresponding solenoid.

  A plurality of terminal portions (substrate-side connectors) 705 and 706 for connecting connectors of various cable connectors are also provided near the lower edge portion of the main substrate 262. The terminal portions 705 and 706 are formed to protrude from the main substrate 262 and are exposed to the outside of the substrate box 263 through holes formed in the lower portion of the box cover 266.

  A cable connector C8 for supplying power is connected to the terminal portion 705. The other end of the cable connector C8 is connected to the terminal portion 591 of the power supply device 313.

  A cable connector C9 for command signals is connected to the terminal portion 706. The other end of the cable connector C9 is connected to the terminal portion 592 of the payout control device 311. As a result, a command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311 via the cable connector C9.

  As can be seen from FIG. 9 and the like, in this embodiment, the terminal portion 702 of the main board 262 and the terminal portion 573 of the sub relay board 570 are provided at relatively close positions, and the cable connector C3 is relatively A cable with a short cable length is used. This is to suppress illegal acts such as so-called “hanging”.

  The base portion 201a of the first control board unit 201 attached to the back frame set 215 is provided with the board mounting portion 201b on which the main controller 261 is mounted separated from the back frame set 215. A gap is formed in. That is, in a state where the first control board unit 201 is mounted on the game board 30 (back frame set 215), a space is secured behind the board mounting portion 201b, and the variable winning device 32 and its electrical wiring can be installed without difficulty. It is like that. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9 and the like, the power supply cable connector C1 that connects the sub-relay board 570 and the power supply device 313 passes through this gap. For this reason, the main controller 261 is covered by the cable connector C1, and the visibility inside the main controller 261 is not hindered. As a result, early detection of fraud etc. becomes possible.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 7, the second control board unit 202 includes a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314. The payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, and the power supply device 313 are equipped with a control board including a central control CPU, ROM, RAM, various ports and the like as is well known. The board 311a (see FIG. 8) controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls. In addition, the launch control board of the launch control apparatus 312 controls the launch apparatus and the like according to the player's operation of the handle 18, and the power board 313a (see FIG. 8) of the power supply apparatus 313 requires predetermined control equipment and the like. Is generated and output.

  The payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, and the power supply device 313 are also configured such that corresponding control boards are accommodated in the board boxes 315, 316, and 317. However, the launch control device 312 (substrate box 316) is disposed behind the power supply device 313 (substrate box 317). Further, the substrate box 315 in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing unit in the same manner as the main control device 261 described above, so that a trace of opening the substrate box 315 remains.

  The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogged in the payout motor unit, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  A plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) 592 and 593 for connecting connectors of various cable connectors are also provided in the vicinity of the upper edge portion of the payout control board 311a. Each of the terminal portions 592 and 593 protrudes from the dispensing control board 311a and is exposed to the outside of the board box 315 through a hole opened at the top of the board box 315.

  The terminal portion 592 is electrically connected to the terminal portion 706 of the main controller 261 via the cable connector C9 as described above.

  On the other hand, a cable connector C10 for power supply is connected to the terminal portion 593. The other end of the cable connector C10 is connected to a terminal portion (not shown) of the power supply device 313.

  The power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, at the end of the game hall), the state before the power is turned off is stored, so that if you want to return to the initial state when turning on the power, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 Is input.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. The back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a resin-formed back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 are integrated.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and the front surface and the lower surface are opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display device unit 35. However, in the present embodiment, a part of the main controller 261 is also covered. The variable display device unit 35 is protected by a protective cover 354 from a game ball or the like falling from an upper tank 355 or the like which will be described later.

  In addition, a large number of ventilation holes 354 a are provided on the back surface of the protective cover portion 354. However, a vent hole 354a is not provided at a rear position of the terminal portion 702 or the like in order to suppress an illegal act on the cable connector C3 or the like connected to the terminal portion 702 or the like. In the closed state of the back pack 351 (back pack unit 203), the protective cover portion 354 is disposed so as to cover the side in which the connector such as the cable connector C3 connected to the terminal portion 702 etc. is pulled out. Become.

  The payout mechanism 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from island facilities of the game arcade are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. Further, a case rail 357 is formed vertically on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism unit 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board for taking in the main power to the power supply device 313 from the outside. 382 is installed. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board 262) of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  The RAM 503 has a configuration in which data can be retained (backed up) by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. In addition to the memory and area, a backup area 503a is provided.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is performed by an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) (the NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 when the power is turned off to the backup area 503a of the RAM 503). Stored) is executed when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, etc., and the recovery of each value written in the backup area 503a is a power recovery process when the power is turned on (including power on when the power failure is resolved, and so on). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 505 and a power supply port 507 are connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, a power supply line, and the like. Of course, the power supply line may be arranged independently from the bus line 504 (the same applies to the circuit configurations of other substrates). The input / output port 505 includes the terminal portions 701 to 704 and the terminal portion 706, and the power supply port 507 includes the terminal portion 705.

  The input / output port 505 is connected to a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312 and a sub relay board 570, which will be described later. In addition, although not shown for convenience, various electrical components such as various detection switches such as the first trigger corresponding port switch 224 and various boards such as the first panel relay board are connected. The power supply to the launch control device 312 and the like is also performed via the main control device 261.

  Further, as described above, the sub relay board 570 is connected to the input / output port 505 of the main control device 261, the input / output port 554 of the sub control device 560, the power supply port 556, and the power supply port 533 of the display control device 45. It is connected to the. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 560 is configured by the connector 578. The sub relay board 570 is also electrically connected to the normal symbol display device 41 and the special display device 43.

  The sub-control device 560 (sub-control board 561) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and various control programs that are stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553 that is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input / output port 554, a bus line (including a power supply line) 555, a power supply port 556, and other interrupt circuits and timer circuits (not shown), data transmission / reception Various circuits such as a circuit are provided. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs. For example, the RAM 553 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counter values to be described later.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 and the power supply port 556 via a bus line 555. Further, the display control device 45, the effect button 125, the speaker SP, the frame lamp group LG1, the panel lamp group LG2, and the like are connected to the input / output port 554. The power supply to the speaker SP, the frame lamp group LG1, the panel lamp group LG2, and the like is also performed via the sub-control device 560.

  The CPU 551 of the sub control device 560 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 via the sub relay board 570, for example, and the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. Further, the sub-control device 560 controls the speaker SP, the frame lamp group LG1, the panel lamp group LG2, and the like, and controls voice and lamp display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not it is a big hit, and the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the sub control device 560. Then, display according to the display of the special display device 43 is performed.

  Further, the sub control device 560 is provided with a volume power saving changeover switch SW for switching the volume level output from the speaker SP and the degree of the power saving state described later (see FIG. 6 and the like). The volume power saving changeover switch SW constitutes a switching operation means in the present embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of the volume power saving changeover switch SW will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b). FIG. 11A is a schematic plan view of the volume power saving switching switch SW, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing the relationship between the scale value of the volume power saving switching switch SW, the volume level, and the power saving level. .

  The volume level is a level representing the volume output from the speaker SP, and in this embodiment, the volume level is switched to four levels from the minimum “0” to the maximum “4”. Here, the volume level “0” means “silent (silenced) state”.

  On the other hand, the power saving level is a level representing the degree of power saving, such as turning off the frame lamp group LG1, etc., and in this embodiment, it is switched to four levels from the minimum “0” to the maximum “4”. Here, the power saving level “0” means “normal state” in which power is not saved. The power saving level “1” indicates a state in which only the “display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42” is saved, and the power saving level “2” indicates “the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42” + “panel lamp group LG2”. The power saving state indicates a power saving level “3”, which indicates a state in which “display part 42a of decorative design display device 42” + “panel lamp group LG2” + “frame lamp group LG1” is saved.

  The volume power saving changeover switch SW is configured to be switchable to 16 points so that the sound volume level 4 steps and the power saving level 4 steps can be respectively designated. For example, when a point with the scale “01” is designated, the volume level “0” and the power saving level “1” are set, and when the point with the scale “23” is designated, the volume is set. Level “2” and power saving level “3” are set.

  Further, the sub-control device 560 periodically reads the point designated by the volume power saving changeover switch SW, and the value of the volume level corresponding to this point and the value of the power saving level are respectively stored in predetermined areas (volume level value rating area, It is stored in the power saving level value storage area.

  Further, the payout control device 311 (the payout control board 311a) performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout motor 358a. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is configured to hold (backup) data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above. The RAM 513 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power off, each register, so that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the NMI interrupt processing, and conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the power recovery processing when the power is turned on.

  In the work area of the RAM 513, a payout permission flag in which the payout permission of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag that is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control A command buffer in which commands transmitted from the device 261 are stored is provided.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 having been restored to power. There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when it is returned to the front, and it is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process (see FIG. 29) described later.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  An input / output port 515 and a power supply port 517 are connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus, a data bus, a power supply line, and the like. The input / output port 515 is configured by the terminal portion 592, and the power supply port 517 is configured by the terminal portion 593.

  A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a payout motor 358a, etc. are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively. The power supply to the payout motor 358a and the like is also performed via the payout control device 311.

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 560. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, a bus line (power supply line). 530, 531 and a power supply port 533. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 560 is connected to the input port 527.

  A CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 and the power supply port 533 through a bus line 530. The input port 527 is configured by the terminal portion 658, and the power supply port 533 is configured by the terminal portion 659.

  An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529. The power supply to the decorative symbol display device 42 is also performed via the display control device 45.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command (command signal) transmitted from the sub-control device 560 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. Control of the VDP 526 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The power supply device 313 (power supply board 313a) is connected to a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and the RAM erase switch 323. A RAM erase switch circuit 543.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power (drive power) to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through an electrical path such as the cable connector C1. As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like.

  As described above, the power supply unit 541 is connected to the power supply port 507 of the main control device 261 and the power supply port 517 of the payout control device 311, and is connected to the power supply port 556 of the sub control device 560 via the sub relay board 570. The display control device 45 is connected to a power supply port 533.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 70, and the launch device 70 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. The launch control device 312 is connected to the main control device 261 via the cable connector C5.

  The firing control device 312 is electrically connected to the variable resistor 445, the touch sensor 451, and the stop switch 455 described above. A signal related to a resistance value is output from the variable resistor 445, and a game is output from the touch sensor 451. A signal regarding whether or not a person is touching the handle 18 and a signal regarding whether or not a predetermined stop lever is being pressed are input from the stop switch 455 to the launch control device 312.

  Further, the signal from the touch sensor 451 is also input to the main control device 261 via the firing control device 312. The main control device 261 outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control device 312 on the condition that a signal indicating that the player is touching the handle 18 is input from the touch sensor 451, and the sub control device. A power saving cancellation signal is output to 560.

  The touch sensor 451 may be directly electrically connected to the main control device 261 without passing through the firing control device 312, and a signal from the touch sensor 451 may be directly input to the main control device 261.

  The power saving cancellation signal is a signal for preventing the sub control device 560 from permitting the power saving setting. That is, while the power saving cancellation signal is output from the main control device 261, the power saving setting by the sub control device 560 is prohibited.

  On the other hand, the launch control device 312 outputs that a launch permission signal is output from the main control device 261, a signal indicating that the player is touching the handle 18 is output from the touch sensor 451, and the stop lever is pressed. On condition that a signal indicating that the operation is being performed is not output from the stop switch 455, the launching device 70 is driven, and the game balls are launched one by one with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. At the time of launching, the power supplied to the launching device 70 is adjusted by the launch control device 312 based on a signal related to the resistance value input from the variable resistor 445, and as a result, the launching speed of the game ball is adjusted. It has become.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 performs lottery (big hit lottery) using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the jackpot random number counter V1 as a lottery random number counter used for the jackpot lottery and the mode determination used for determining the transition to the high probability mode or the low probability mode described later when the jackpot is won. The counter V2, the variation selection counter V3 used for determining the variation display time of the special display device 43, the initial value random number counter VINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter V1, and the variation display time of the special display device 43 The variation type counters VS1 and VS2 used for determining the normal symbol and the normal symbol random number counter V4 used for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 41 are used. Note that the variation selection counter V3 is also used for a variation pattern or reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display device 43 is determined according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the effect pattern (effect mode) are determined.

  Each of the counters V1, V2, V3, VINI, VS1, VS2, and V4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 that is the lower limit value after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter VINI).

  The RAM 503 is provided with a first reserved ball storage area and a second reserved ball storage area as a storage area composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). In each area of the first reserved ball storage area, the values of the jackpot random number counter V1, the mode determination counter V2, and the variation selection counter V3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the first opportunity corresponding port 33. It is designed to be stored. Further, in each area of the second reserved ball storage area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the second opportunity corresponding port 34. Yes.

  In detail, each jackpot random number counter V1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 676, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (ie, 676) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the jackpot random number counter V1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter VINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter V1. The initial value random number counter VINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter V1 (value = 0 to 676), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter V1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter V1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, the value of the jackpot random number counter V1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding port 33. There are two types of jackpot random numbers, a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode, etc.) and a high probability state (high probability mode). The number of random number values to be 2 is “337, 673”, the number of random number values that are jackpots in the high probability state is 10, and the value is “67, 131, 199, 269,337,401,463,523,601,661 ".

  Here, various game modes will be described. In the present embodiment, the game mode (game state) is switched between a normal mode (normal state) and a plurality of specific modes that are more advantageous to the player than the normal mode. More specifically, as the specific mode, two modes, a high probability mode and a time reduction mode, are set. Among these, the high probability mode is a game mode that continues until the next jackpot, and the time reduction mode is a mode that shifts to the next mode after the predetermined period.

  The normal mode refers to a normal state that is not a specific mode such as the high probability mode. Therefore, in the normal mode, the jackpot probability (winning probability of the jackpot state) is a normal low probability.

  In addition, the high probability mode is a big hit when the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed with “red” (the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with a predetermined probability variation symbol), and the subsequent big hit A state in which the probability is higher than that in the low probability state. In the following description, the case where the decorative symbol display device 42 is a jackpot due to the probability variation symbol is referred to as “probability variation jackpot”, and the case where the jackpot is due to a normal symbol other than the probability variation symbol is referred to as “normal jackpot”.

  In the high probability mode, the jackpot probability is increased and a high probability state is obtained. In addition, in this embodiment, (1) a state in which the variable display time in the special display device 43 is shortened (time shortening state). (2) A state in which the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened, (3) a state in which a specified time (opening time) related to the opening / closing process of the first trigger corresponding port 33 is made longer than in the normal mode, or A state in which the prescribed number (winning number) is increased compared to the normal mode, and (4) when a winning result indicating that the “○” symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 is obtained. A state in which the number of executions of the opening / closing process of the corresponding port 33 is increased as compared with the normal mode. (5) The probability that the “○” symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (winning probability) in the normal mode is selected. Higher state is given. More specifically, in the high probability mode, the opening / closing member of the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is in an open state, and when a specified time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed or a specified number (for example, 3) of game balls have entered. It will be closed when there is. This opening / closing process is repeated twice. As a result, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is opened frequently, and the big hit lottery is continuously made, and the ball is well held. In addition to this, as a high probability mode, in addition to increasing the jackpot probability (winning probability of the jackpot state), any combination of the above configurations (1) to (5) (for example, (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (1) and (2), (1) and (3), (1) and (4), (1) and (5), (2) and (3 ), (2) and (4), (2) and (5), (3) and (4), (3) and (5), (4) and (5), (1) and (2) (3), (1) and (2) and (4), (1) and (2) and (5), (1) and (3) and (4), (1) and (3) and (5 ), (1) and (4) and (5), (2) and (3) and (4), (2) and (3) and (5), (2) and (4) and (5), (3), (4) and (5), (1), (2), (3) and (4), (1), (2), (3) and (5), (1) and (2 ) And (4) (5) can be employed (1) and (3) and (4) (5), and (2) and (3) and (4) (5)). In addition, the ratio of the open state with respect to the closed state per unit time in the 1st opportunity corresponding port 33 will be in a state higher than the ratio at the time of a normal mode by the state of said (2)-(5). That is, such a state corresponds to the high ball entering state in the present embodiment. Therefore, the high probability mode can be paraphrased as a high probability, a time reduction, and a high pitching mode. On the other hand, a state that is not in the states (2) to (5) as in the normal mode corresponds to a low entry state.

  In addition, the time reduction mode is a big hit when the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed in “green” (the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with a normal symbol other than a predetermined probability variation symbol). Thereafter, the game mode is set while the variable display of the special display device 43 is performed 100 times, which means a state more advantageous to the player than the normal mode. The time reduction mode is a gaming mode in which the jackpot probability is as low as that in the normal mode, and the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is higher than the ratio in the normal mode. . In the present embodiment, the states (1) to (5) given in the high probability mode are given in the same manner. That is, except for the difference in jackpot probability (winning probability in the jackpot state), the same state (time shortening state and high pitching state) is obtained. Of course, as in the high probability mode, any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) can be adopted. Therefore, the time shortening mode can be restated as a low probability / time shortening / high pitching mode.

  For example, the mode determination counter V2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9), the mode determination counter V2 returns to the lower limit value of 0. In this embodiment, the mode determination counter V2 determines whether or not to shift to the high probability mode after the big hit. Specifically, if the counter value is an odd number such as “1, 3, 5, 7, 9”, the transition to the high probability mode is determined, and if the counter value is an even number such as “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”. In this case, the transition to the time reduction mode is determined. Although the term “transition” is used here, the high probability mode is continued if the counter value is odd when originally in the high probability mode, and the counter value is even when originally in the time reduction mode. If so, the time shortening mode is continued. The mode decision counter V2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the mode decision counter V2 is stored in the mode decision counter buffer. The value of the mode determination counter V2 stored in the mode determination counter buffer is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding port 33.

  In addition, the variation selection counter V3 is configured such that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to 0, which is a lower limit value. In this embodiment, after the reach is generated with respect to the decorative symbol by the variation selection counter V3, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol, and the “stop off-front reach” is stopped. “Reach other than front / rear detachment” where the symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol and “completely disengagement” where the reach does not occur are selected by lottery. For example, V3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front / rear outreach and V3 = 2 to 21 correspond to reach other than front / rear disengagement, and V3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to complete disengagement. The reach lottery may be individually set according to the state of the lottery probability, the number of starting reserved balls at the start of change, and the like. The fluctuation selection counter V3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter V3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding port 33, the value of the variation selection counter V3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503.

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters VS1 and VS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 198), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter VS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 240) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. In the following description, VS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and VS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”. This is shown in FIG. The first variation type counter VS1 determines the reach type (reach pattern) of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter VS2 determines the final after the occurrence of reach. A more detailed symbol variation mode such as an elapsed time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops is determined. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters VS1 and VS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter VS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter VS1 and the stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when “big hit” occurs, one of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected, and when “out-of-front reach” occurs, normal reach and super reach are selected. When either one is selected and “reach other than front / rear out” occurs, normal reach is selected. In addition, in the case of “completely off”, none of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected.

  The variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are updated once every time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of VS1 and VS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the big hit random number counter V1, the variation selection counter V3, and the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter V4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 250) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The normal symbol random number counter V4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right second trigger corresponding port 34. Is done. Normally, there are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is “5 to 153”. On the other hand, in the high probability mode and the time reduction mode, that is, in the case where the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is in the high pitching state, there are 224, and the range is “5-228”. That is, the probability of stopping the symbol “◯” in the normal symbol display device 41 is higher than that in the normal mode. When the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter V4 is acquired, the symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed after the normal symbol display device 41 performs the variable display for a predetermined time. Then, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is activated for a predetermined time. Further, in the high probability mode and the time reduction mode, the time until the lottery result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (variable display time of the normal symbol) is shortened. The ratio at which the mouth 33 is in a high entrance state increases. As a result, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is frequently opened, and the big hit lottery is continuously performed.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example.

  In FIG. 15, first, in step S301, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter VINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter V1, the mode determination counter V2, the variation selection counter V3, and the normal symbol random number counter V4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, 676, 9 respectively. , 238, 250) is cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters V1, V2, V3, V4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning in the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is executed, and in step S305, a second opportunity corresponding port passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the second opportunity corresponding port 34 is performed. Run. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S <b> 501, whether or not the game ball has won the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is determined based on the detection information of the first opportunity corresponding port switch 224. If it is determined that the game ball has won the first opportunity corresponding port 33, in the subsequent step S502, it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). The process proceeds to step S503 on the condition that there is a winning at the first opportunity corresponding port 33 and the number N of starting reserved balls is smaller than 4, and the number N of starting reserved balls is incremented.

  In subsequent step S504, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the values of the jackpot random number counter V1, the mode determination counter V2, and the variation selection counter V3 updated by the random number update process in step S303 are used as the first free storage area in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. Store in the area. Thereafter, the start winning process is temporarily terminated.

  Next, the second opportunity corresponding port passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the second opportunity corresponding port 34 is determined based on the detection information of the second opportunity corresponding port switch 225. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second opportunity corresponding port 34, in the subsequent step S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of retained balls of the normal symbol display device 41 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine. The process proceeds to step S603 on the condition that there is a passage to the second opportunity corresponding port 34 and the number of reserved balls N <4, and the number of reserved balls N is incremented by one. In subsequent step S604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the second opportunity corresponding port passing process is temporarily ended.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 16 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (the sub-control device 560, the payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S103, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S113 to clear (erase) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S105 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored. In this case as well, the process proceeds to step S113. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S106, and in the subsequent step S107, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process also proceeds to step S113 in this case.

  In the process of step S113, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 560, the payout control device 311 and the like, which are control devices on the sub side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S114, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S114, etc.). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S114 or the like). That is, in step S114, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S115, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S112, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S104: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S108, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S109, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared. In step S110, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted, and in step S111, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S112, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display device 43 and the first opportunity corresponding port 33 updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, or the like is transmitted to the sub-control device 560. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are commands (command information) output to the sub-control device 560 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect in accordance with the display performed on the special display device 43. is there. On the other hand, the sub control device 560 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 so as to display (variable display).

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode, any one of “FF10”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, and “FF16” is set as the variation pattern command. In the high probability mode, “FD10”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, “FD16” are set, and in the time reduction mode, “FE10”, “FE11”. , “FE12”, “FE13”, “FE14”, “FE15”, “FE16” are set. On the other hand, the sub-control device 560 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and decoration symbol variation types in a table (see FIG. 33). Then, the sub control device 560 executes an effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  Normal reach is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. In the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach, “FF11” is set in the normal mode, “FD11” is set in the high probability mode, and “FE11” is set in the time reduction mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time for which the normal reach is derived is set to “20 seconds” in the normal mode, “8 seconds” in the high probability mode, and “10 seconds” in the time reduction mode.

  Super Reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. is there. In this embodiment, three types (super reach SR1, SR2, SR3) of 30 second, 40 second, and 50 second patterns are prepared for the super reach in the normal mode. Note that the variable display time in the high probability mode and in the time reduction mode is shortened compared to that in the normal mode, as in the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the case of the super reach SR1, “FF12” in the normal mode, “FD12” in the high probability mode, and “FE12” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern commands. In the case of the super reach SR2, “FF13” in the normal mode, “FD13” in the high probability mode, and “FE13” in the time reduction mode are set. In the case of the super reach SR3, “FF14” in the normal mode, “FD14” in the high probability mode, and “FE14” in the time reduction mode are set.

  Premium reach is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character with a different pattern from the super reach is displayed. This is a reach pattern that makes the player have a sense of expectation. In the premium reach of this embodiment, two types (premium reach PR1, PR2) of 60-second and 70-second patterns are prepared in the normal mode. Note that the variable display time in the high probability mode and in the time reduction mode is shortened compared to that in the normal mode, as in the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the premium reach PR1, “FF15” in the normal mode, “FD15” in the high probability mode, and “FE15” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern command. In the premium reach PR2, “FF16” in the normal mode, “FD16” in the high probability mode, and “FE16” in the time reduction mode are set.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to “complete out” that does not reach any reach state is set to “FF10” in the normal mode, “FD10” in the high probability mode, and “FE10” in the time reduction mode. The In the present embodiment, the variable display time that is completely off is set to 10 seconds in the normal mode. Of course, the variable display time in the high probability mode and the time shortening mode is shortened compared to the normal mode as in the normal reach.

  Further, the sub-control device 560 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 560 to determine a stop symbol. A combination of probability variation symbols, a normal symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a completely out symbol design combination. Five classifications are designated, which are the combinations. These divisions are indicated by “A1”, “A2”, “A3”, “A4”, “A5”, and any of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 560 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 560 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the stop symbol classification and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described.

  The combination of probability variation symbols is a combination of symbols composed of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 and “A1” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of probability variation symbols. Then, when “A1” indicating the probability variation symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 560 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 that are all flat. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of normal symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6 and 8, and “A2” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of normal symbols. Then, when “A2” indicating the normal symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 560 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of back and forth symbols corresponds to the combination of back and forth symbols, where after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by one shift before and after the reach symbol. “A3” is set in the symbol command. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to the “reach other than front / rear detachment” that occurs after reach occurs, and the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol. “A4” is set in the command. The combination of complete detachment symbols corresponds to “complete detachment” in which no reach occurs, and “A5” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of complete detachment symbols. As will be described later in detail, when “A3” to “A5” are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 560 stops the symbol combination stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. In the present embodiment, three commands “A3” to “A5” are prepared for the symbol command for detachment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration having only one symbol command for detachment may be used.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 14, in step S202, update of the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 is executed. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters VS 1 and VS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In subsequent step S203, various payout information received from the payout control device 311 (for example, a prize ball counting signal or a payout abnormality signal) is read.

  In step S204, on the condition that a signal indicating that the player is touching the handle 18 is input from the touch sensor 451, a setting is made to output a firing permission signal to the firing control device 312 and the sub-control is performed. The apparatus 560 is set to output a power saving cancellation signal.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the special display device 43 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the special display device 43, and the jackpot determination and the decorative pattern variation pattern (effect pattern) in the decorative design display device 42 are performed. Settings are made. Details of the first display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, variable winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what control is performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when the big win state (special game state) is reached, the opening / closing process of the big winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are set as to what kind of control is performed in the normal symbol display device 41. Details of the second display control process will be described later.

  In step S208, an opportunity corresponding opening / closing control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the opening / closing member is set as to what kind of control is performed on the opening / closing member of the first opportunity corresponding port 33.

  After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal processing (this embodiment) It is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter VINI and the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S211, step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter VINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter VINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment).

  In step S212, the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the change values of the variation type counters VS 1 and VS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter VINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter V1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter VINI using the remaining time, and to change similarly. The type counters VS1 and VS2 can also be updated at random.

  Now, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step S213 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. To remember. Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The process of step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Further, since the interruption processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the first display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 19, in step S801, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made. The jackpot includes a jackpot state (special game state) and a predetermined time after the jackpot state ends.

  In the subsequent step S802, it is determined whether or not color change display (variation display) is being performed by the special display device 43 by looking at the setting status of the display timer. Specifically, when the display timer is set (when it is in the on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and when the display timer is released (when it is in the off state), the variable display is in a stopped state. It is considered that the stop display is in progress. If it is not a big hit and is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S803, where it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is greater than zero. At this time, if it is a big hit or if the number N of starting reserved balls is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  Further, if neither the big hit or the variable display is being displayed and if the number of starting reserved balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, 1 is subtracted from the number N of starting reserved balls. In step S805, processing for shifting the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas on hold in the first holding ball storage area to the execution area side. Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  Thereafter, in step S806, a variable display setting process is executed. Here, the details of the variable display setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the big hit random number counter V1 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter V1 and the mode at that time, and as described above, in the low probability state such as the normal mode, the numerical value 0 to 676 of the jackpot random number counter V1. Among them, “337, 673” is a winning value, and in the high probability mode, “67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661” is a winning value. If it is determined that the game is a big hit (step S901: YES), the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S901: NO), that is, when it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S909.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot. In the present embodiment, the system is configured to shift to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode with a probability of 1/2 in the case of a big hit. Specifically, whether or not to shift to the high probability mode is determined based on the value of the mode determination counter V2 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. If the value of the stored mode determination counter V2 is an odd number “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” among the numerical values 0 to 9, the transition to the high probability mode is determined (probability large hit), and the even number “ If it is 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 ", the transition to the time reduction mode is determined (usually a big hit).

  Here, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot (step S902: YES), the jackpot variation pattern is determined in step S904, and the probability variation symbol (“A1” in the present embodiment) is set to the symbol command in step S905. Then, the process proceeds to step S917.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S902 that it is not a probable big hit (step S902: NO), that is, if it is a normal big hit, a big hit variation pattern is determined in step S907, and a normal symbol (this embodiment) is determined in step S908. Then, “A2”) is set as the symbol command, and the process proceeds to step S917.

  In steps S904 and S907, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined, and the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern command. At this time, the values of the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are confirmed, and the symbol variation mode of the decorative symbol is determined based on the values of the first and second variation type counters VS1 and VS2. . The relationship between the value of the first variation type counter VS1 and the reach pattern (variation type) and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter VS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like for each game mode. . Note that the mode determination in the present embodiment is performed by a combination of on / off states of a high probability state flag, a time shortening state flag, and a high entry state flag, which will be described later. For example, if the high probability state flag, the time shortening state flag, and the high pitched state flag are all on (flag value “1”), it is determined that the mode is a high probability mode.

  Here, the correspondence between the numerical values of the first variation type counter VS1 and the second variation type counter VS2 and the variation type will be described. For example, at the big hit time in the normal mode, the correspondence is defined by a normal mode big hit table as shown in FIG. That is, when VS1 = 0 to 9, “FF11” (normal reach) is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the value of VS2. When VS1 = 10 to 196 and VS2 = 0 to 69, “FF12” (super reach SR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 10 to 196 and VS2 = 70 to 149, “FF13” (super reach SR2) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 10 to 196 and VS2 = 150 to 240, “FF14” (super reach SR3) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 197, 198 and VS2 = 0-120, “FF15” (premium reach PR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 197, 198 and VS2 = 121-240, “FF16” (premium reach PR2) is set in the variation pattern command.

  The symbol commands in step S905 and step S908 indicate the jackpot symbol in a predetermined section, and the sub controller 560 determines the stop symbol as described later. Specifically, when “A1” indicating the combination of probability variation symbols is set in the symbol command (step S905), the symbol combination of any one of the first, third, fifth, seventh, and ninth slots is sub-selected. Control device 560 determines the stop symbol. On the other hand, when “A2” indicating the combination of normal symbols is set in the symbol command (step S908), any combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is changed to the sub-control device 560. Is determined as a stop symbol. After the symbol command is set in step S905 and step S908, the process proceeds to step S917.

  In step S909, which is shifted when a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a reach is reached. This determination is made based on the value of the variation selection counter V3 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation selection counter V3 causes the final stop symbol after the occurrence of reach to stop by shifting by one by one before and after the reach symbol, and the final stop after the occurrence of reach. The symbol “Leach other than front / rear detachment” that stops when it is not before or after the reach symbol, and “Complete detachment” that does not generate reach are selected by lottery. 2 to 21 correspond to reach other than front / rear disengagement, and V3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to complete disengagement. Here, when it is determined that it is reach (step S909: YES), the process proceeds to step S910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not reach (step S909: NO), that is, if it is “completely out”, a dislocation variation pattern is determined in step S915, and a complete out symbol is set as a symbol command in step S916. Then, the process proceeds to step S917.

  In step S910, it is determined whether or not the front / rear reach is reached. If it is determined that the front / rear reach is out of step (step S910: YES), a deviation variation pattern is determined in step S911, the front / rear pattern is set as a symbol command in step S912, and the process proceeds to step S917. . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not front / rear detachment (step S910: NO), that is, when it is reach other than front / rear detachment, a detachment variation pattern is determined in step S913, and symbols other than front / rear detachment are determined in step S914. The command is set, and the process proceeds to step S917.

  When the outlier variation pattern is determined in steps S911, S913, and S915, the variation pattern is determined based on the values of the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. And so on.

  Here, the correspondence between the numerical value of the first variation type counter VS1 and the variation type will be described. For example, at the time of front / rear detachment during the normal mode, the correspondence is defined by a front / rear detachment table during the normal mode as shown in FIG. That is, when VS1 = 0 to 9, “FF11” (normal reach) is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the value of VS2. When VS1 = 10 to 198 and VS2 = 0 to 90, “FF12” (super reach SR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 10 to 198 and VS2 = 91 to 170, “FF13” (super reach SR2) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 10 to 198 and VS2 = 171 to 240, “FF14” (super reach SR3) is set in the variation pattern command. At the time of reach other than forward / backward deviation (V3 = 2 to 21), normal reach is performed regardless of the values of the variation type counters VS1 and VS2, and “FF11” is set in the variation pattern command. Further, at the time of complete deviation (V3 = 22 to 238), “FF10” is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the values of the variation type counters VS1 and VS2.

  Further, the symbol command in step S912, step S914, and step S916 indicates a predetermined division of the combination of symbols that are out of the same manner as in step S905 and the like. Specifically, when “A3” indicating the combination of the front and rear symbols is set in the symbol command (step S912), the sub-control device 560 that has received the symbol command stores it in the front and rear error symbol buffer of the RAM 553. The combination of symbols corresponding to the front / rear out of reach is determined as the stop symbol. When “A4” indicating a combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment is set in the symbol command (step S914), a combination of symbols corresponding to reach other than front / rear detachment stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear detachment of RAM 553 is selected. The sub control device 560 determines the stop symbol. When the symbol command “A5” indicating the combination of complete losing symbols is set in the symbol command (step S916), the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete detachment stored in the complete losing symbol buffer of the RAM 553 is sub-control unit 560. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  In step S917, start setting processing is performed to indicate that a condition for performing color change display (variation display) is satisfied in the special display device 43. In this start setting process, a display timer setting process is performed. The display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. For example, when the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), it is set to 10000 msec. As will be described later, the display timer is decremented by 4 msec every time the normal process is performed once. In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design selected by the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display device 43 in the present embodiment. Based on such setting of the display timer, when a control signal for starting color change display (variation display) is output to the special display device 43 in the next external output processing of normal processing, special display is performed. Color change display is started in the device 43. The special display device 43 is a three-color LED as described above, and changes color to green if the lit color is red, blue if it is green, and red if it is blue. Then, after step S917 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19, if step S802 is YES, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S807 to perform display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when a display timer of 10000 msec is set, the value of the display timer is 9996 msec in the display timer subtraction process in the next normal process for the time when the display timer is set.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S808, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S808. If an affirmative determination is made in step S808, the display timer is canceled [turned off (cleared)] in step S809, and stop display setting for performing a stop display on the special display device 43 is performed in step S810. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the next external output process in the normal process. In other words, if it is a promiscuous jackpot with a transition to the high probability mode, the red is stopped (for example, lighted only for a few seconds), and if it is a regular jackpot with a transition to the time reduction mode, the green is stopped and displayed. If it is off, blue is stopped and displayed. Again, the main display is such a stop display by the special display device 43, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary.

  In step S811, discrimination information setting processing is performed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, it is determined in step S1001 whether or not the stop display corresponds to a jackpot. Here, when it corresponds to jackpot, it transfers to step S1002 and performs jackpot setting. Specifically, processing for setting a jackpot flag, a variable flag, a variable timer, and a round number counter is performed. And after completion | finish of step S1002, a discrimination | determination information setting process is complete | finished.

  The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is a special gaming state, and here, “1” indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set as the flag value. The value of the jackpot flag is determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter V1.

  The variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in an open state.

  The variable timer is means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening.

  The round number counter is discriminating information for discriminating the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of special prize occurrences, that is, the number of executions of the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32), as will be described later. “15” indicating 15 rounds is set as a value.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the jackpot does not correspond, that is, it is determined that the game is out of place, the process proceeds to step S1003.

  In step S1003, it is determined whether or not a variation counter is set. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed). As will be described later, “100” is set as the counter value after the end of the normal jackpot.

  Here, when the variation counter is canceled (in the off state), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the variation counter is set (in the ON state), it is regarded that the time reduction state is being set, and in step S1004, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1005. To do.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is zero. That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the 100th variation display after the end of the normal jackpot (after the provision of the time reduction state). Here, if the remaining value of the variation counter is 0 count, a process of resetting a high pitching state flag described later in step S1006 is performed (set to “0”), and a time shortening state flag described later is set in step S1007. A process of resetting (setting “0”) is performed, a process of canceling (turning off) the variation counter is performed in step S1008, and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1005 that the value of the variation counter is not 0 count, the present process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, after the discrimination information setting process in step S <b> 811 is finished, the first display control process is finished. If the determination in step S808 is negative, in step S812, the color change display setting for continuously performing the color change display (fluctuation display) of the LED of the special display device 43 is performed, and this process is terminated. To do. Based on the setting contents of the color change display setting, a control signal for performing color change display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process in the next normal process. Specifically, it is set to change the color to green if the current lighting color is red, blue if it is green, and red if it is blue. Thereby, the color change display (variable display) of the LED of the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms. In the present embodiment, the determination information setting process (step S811) is performed after the stop display setting process (step S810). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display setting process (step S806). It is good also as a structure performed after.

  Next, the variable winning device control process in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the variable flag of the variable winning device 32 is on. Here, when it is determined that the variable flag is not ON (OFF), this processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, the variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, and when the variable flag is set in the determination processing of step S1201 ( When the variable flag is released (in the off state), it is regarded as being in the closed state.

  Based on the ON / OFF state of the variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the big prize opening is output to the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning device 32 is opened. On the other hand, when the variable flag is OFF, a control signal is output to the variable winning device 32 to close the big winning opening, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the variable flag is on, the variable winning device 32 is considered to be in the open state, and variable timer subtraction processing is performed in step S1202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the variable timer is decremented by 4 msec.

  In step S1203, the value of the variable timer after the subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the specified open time has elapsed. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the variable timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1203. If a positive determination is made in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 32 in step S1205 has reached a specified number. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step S1204. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 has not reached the prescribed number, this processing is terminated as it is. Therefore, the variable winning device 32 maintains the open state until the specified opening time elapses or until the specified number of game balls wins, and becomes the closed state when the condition is satisfied.

  Proceeding to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the number of times the variable winning device 32 has been released, that is, the number of executed rounds has reached a specified number (the value of the round number counter is 0), taking into account the value of the round number counter. . Here, if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number, in step S1206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter, and this process is terminated as it is. That is, the opening / closing process is repeated until the number of executed rounds reaches a predetermined number of times set in advance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1204 that the number of rounds has reached the specified number, an end setting process is performed in step S1207, and the process ends.

  In the end setting process of step S1207, the variable flag and variable timer reset process (cancellation process), the jackpot flag reset process, the round number counter reset process, the high probability state flag setting process, and the time reduction state flag setting process Then, a process for setting a high pitching state flag, a process for setting a variation counter, etc. are performed.

  More specifically, the variable flag and the variable timer are released (turned off) by the reset process of the variable flag and the variable timer.

  In the jackpot flag reset process, “0” indicating the end of the jackpot state is set as the flag value.

  The round number counter is canceled (off) by the reset processing of the round number counter.

  The high probability state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high probability state. In the high probability state flag setting process, the high probability state flag is stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. Based on the value of the current mode determination counter V2, the flag value is switched and set. As a result, when the high probability mode is set after the jackpot ends (probability jackpot), “1” indicating the occurrence of a high probability state is set as the flag value, and the time reduction mode is set (normal jackpot) “0” indicating the occurrence of a low probability state is set as the flag value.

  The time reduction state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a time reduction state. In the time reduction state flag setting process, “1” indicating that a time reduction state is generated is set. Set as a flag value.

  The high entry state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high entry state, and indicates that the high entry state is generated in the high entry state flag setting process. “1” is set as the flag value.

  The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed) as described above. In the variation counter setting process, the high probability state flag setting process and Similarly, switching setting of the variation number counter is performed based on the value of the mode determination counter V2. Thus, when the high probability mode is set after the jackpot is finished (probability jackpot), the variation counter is canceled (off). On the other hand, when the time reduction mode is set (usually a big hit), “100” corresponding to 100 fluctuation displays is set as the value of the fluctuation counter.

  Next, the second display control process of step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 24, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not switching display (variation display) by the normal symbol display device 41 is being performed by looking at the setting state of the display timer. Specifically, when the display timer is set (when it is in the on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and when the display timer is released (when it is in the off state), the variable display is in a stopped state. It is considered that the stop display is in progress. If it is not in the variable display, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether or not the number of reserved balls N is greater than zero. At this time, if the number of reserved balls N is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the variable display is not being performed and the number of held balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved balls N. In step S2104, a process for shifting the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  Thereafter, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that a condition for performing switching display (variable display) is established. Specifically, the display timer setting process of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. Note that the variable display time of the normal symbol display device 41 in the present embodiment is set in advance in each of the high and low entrance states as described above. Based on such setting of the display timer, when a control signal for starting switching display (variation display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing of the normal processing, the normal symbol is output. Switching display is started on the display device 41. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display “O” or “X” as an ordinary symbol. If the displayed symbol is “O”, “X”, “X” "Is switched to" ○ ". Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

  If step S2101 is YES, that is, if variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S2106 to perform display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is subtracted by 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2107. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the display timer is released [turned off (cleared)] in step S2108, and stop display setting for performing stop display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process in the normal process. That is, in the case of winning, the “◯” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being off, the “x” symbol is stopped.

  As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is made based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 stored in the execution area of the second reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the winning is made is determined based on the relationship between the value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 and the mode at that time, and as described above, the numerical value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 in the low entry state such as the normal mode. Of the 0 to 250, “5-153” is the winning value, and “5 to 228” is the winning value in a high pitched state such as the high probability mode.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110 to perform discrimination information setting processing, and this processing is terminated. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for performing an opening / closing process of the first opportunity corresponding port 33 (opening / closing member) is performed. Specifically, a setting process of a variable flag, a variable timer, and an opening number counter is performed.

  The variable flag is discrimination information for discriminating whether or not the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is open.

  The variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time of the first opportunity corresponding port 33, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening.

  The opening number counter is determination information for determining the number of execution times of the opening / closing process of the first opportunity corresponding port 33.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111 a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, “×” is displayed, and if “×”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the opportunity corresponding port opening / closing control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the variable flag of the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is on. Here, when it is determined that the variable flag is not ON (OFF), this processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, the variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is in the open state, and the variable flag is set in the determination processing in step S2201. In the case (in the on state), it is regarded as being in the open state, and in the case where the variable flag is released (in the case of the off state), it is regarded as being in the closed state.

  Based on the ON / OFF state of the variable flag, various control signals are output to the opening / closing member (opening / closing member solenoid) of the first trigger corresponding port 33 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the variable flag is on, a control signal for opening the opening / closing member is output, and the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is opened. On the other hand, when the variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the opening / closing member is output, and the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is closed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the variable flag is on, the first trigger corresponding port 33 is considered to be open, and variable timer subtraction processing is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the variable timer is decremented by 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the variable timer after the subtraction. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the variable timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process advances to step S2204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won in the first opportunity corresponding port 33 in step S2205 has reached a prescribed number. If an affirmative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step S2204. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2205, that is, if the number of winnings in the first opportunity corresponding port 33 has not reached the specified number, this processing is terminated as it is. Accordingly, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is kept open until a specified opening time elapses or until a specified number of game balls are won, and is closed when the above condition is satisfied.

  Proceeding to step S2204, it is determined whether or not the number of times of opening the first opportunity corresponding port 33 has reached a specified number by taking into account the value of the number of times of opening counter (the value of the number of opening counter is 0). If the number of times of opening has not reached the specified number of times, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of times of opening counter in step S2206, and this process is terminated. That is, the opening / closing process is repeatedly performed until a predetermined number of times set in advance is reached.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2204 that the number of times of opening has reached the specified number of times, an end setting process is performed in step S2207, and this process ends.

  In the end setting process in step S2207, the variable flag and variable timer reset process (release process), the release number counter reset process, and the like are performed.

  More specifically, the variable flag and the variable timer are released (turned off) by the reset process of the variable flag and the variable timer. Further, the release number counter is released (turned off) by the reset process of the release number counter.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 26, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control apparatus 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control apparatus 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and if it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full state is performed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower pan 15 is detected based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set, and when the lower pan full is not reached , Set the lower pan full release state. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or a tank ball absence release state (ball state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, for example, the presence / absence of a state to be notified, such as an error state, is determined.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to execute the ball removal process by driving the payout motor 358a on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In the subsequent step S3212, vibrator control (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, processing of the sub control device 560 will be described. When the sub-control device 560 receives various command signals such as a variation pattern command and a power saving release signal from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 560 controls the decorative symbol display device 42, the speaker SP, and the like based on the various command signals.

  Here, the normal processing of the sub-control device 560 will be described in more detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This normal process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  After step S3902 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (in this example, It is determined whether or not 1 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3912.

  In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 560 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the off-set symbols of the big symbol decoration symbol counter V5, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each off symbol counter VL, VM, VR is used. The off symbol counters VL, VM, VR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter V5 determines a symbol when the variation of the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped (a jackpot symbol) at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 determines whether the decorative symbol is variable. There are 5 patterns and 5 normal symbols. Accordingly, five (0 to 4) counter values are prepared as the big hit decoration symbol counter V5. In other words, the jackpot decorative symbol counter V5 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 4, and reaches 0 to the upper limit value (that is, 4). When the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “A1” indicating a combination of probability variation symbols, for example, based on a table (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols), the counter value is If it is 0, it is “1”. ) If it is 4, the combination of probability variation symbols is determined in such a manner as “9” (the flat eye). When the symbol command is “A2” indicating a combination of normal symbols, for example, if the counter value is 0, “0” (based on a table (not shown) that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) ( 1) “2” (for the doublet), 2 for “4” (for the doublet), 3 for “6” (for the doublet), 4 for “8” ”(The doublet) and the normal symbol combination is determined. The jackpot decorative symbol counter V5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 560 receives the symbol command as will be described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter V5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the symbol command. It may be.

  Upper, middle, and lower off symbol counters VL, VM, and VR determine each stop symbol (combination of off symbols) in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the big hit lottery is missed. Since each of the ten decorative symbols is displayed in each column, ten (0 to 9) counter values are prepared for each column. The stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the up / down symbol counter VL, the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle / off symbol counter VM, and the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower / off symbol counter VR. Is determined.

  In this embodiment, the value of each counter VL, VM, VR is updated at random by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each outlier symbol counter VL, VM, VR is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. The Each outlier symbol counter VL, VM, VR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these outlier symbol counters VL, VM, VR is the front / rear outreach symbol buffer of RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out, and It is stored in one of the completely off symbol buffers.

  Here, the updating process of each off symbol counter VL, VM, VR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 32, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the up / out symbol counter VL. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the center / out symbol counter VM. The upper, middle and lower outlier symbol counters VL, VM, VR are configured to be updated one by one in a single update process. Accordingly, if the down / out symbol counter VR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the up / down symbol counter VL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the up / down symbol counter VL (step S4001 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4003, and the up / out symbol counter VL is updated. If it is the time to update the middle / outgoing symbol counter VM (YES in step S4002), the process advances to step S4004 to update the middle / outlier symbol counter VM. Further, if it is time to update the down / out symbol counter VR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005, and the down / out symbol counter VR is updated. In updating the out-of-step symbol counters VL, VM, VR in steps S4003 to S4005, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous counter value, and 10 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters VL, VM, VR.

  According to the above update processing of VL, VM, VR, each of the up / down / outward symbol counters VL, VM, VR is updated one by one in one update processing, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is nothing. Thus, every time the update process is executed three times, the set symbol counters VL, VM, VR are updated for one set.

  After that, in step S4006, the combination of the updated symbol counters VL, VM, VR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas And the symbol in the middle symbol display area are different from each other), and in the case of a combination of reach symbols (S4006 is YES), in step S4007, it is a back-and-forth outreach. It is determined whether or not there is. If the out symbol counters VL, VM, VR are a combination of front / rear out of reach (front / back out symbol) (YES in S4007), the process proceeds to step S4008, and the combination of the out symbol counters VL, VM, VR at that time is changed to the RAM 553. Is stored in the front / rear reach reach symbol buffer. If the off symbol counters VL, VM, VR are a combination of reach other than front / rear off (design other than front / rear off) (NO in S4007), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the off symbol counters VL, VM, VR at that time The combination is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and rear deviation of the RAM 553.

  If the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the process proceeds to step S4010 to determine whether or not the combination of the symbol symbols VL, VM, and VR is a symbol combination. If it is a combination of symbols (completely deviated symbols) (YES in S4010), the process proceeds to step S4011, and the combination of deviated symbol counters VL, VM, VR at that time is stored in the completely deviated symbol buffer of the RAM 553. If NO in both steps S4006 and S4010, the symbols are aligned at the top, middle, and bottom, that is, a combination of jackpot symbols. In such a case, the out symbol counters VL, VM, and VR are used as buffers. This process is terminated without storing.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 30, display setting processing is performed in step S3907. In this processing, various arithmetic processing such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed based on information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. More specifically, the sub-control device 560 determines a display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on a table associating the decorative symbol variation type and the variation pattern command as shown in FIG. A value corresponding to the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation time timer.

  The display command described above is, for example, a command for designating a series of display effects from the start to the end of variable display, or a command for designating a display effect during a jackpot, based on information stored in the command buffer. Each time a necessary display command is generated. Usually, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 560 are roughly divided into a normal variable data group, a reach effect data group, and the like. Basically, each data constituting these data groups is the variable time timer. Are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time order, thereby providing display effects according to various variation patterns. For example, the normal fluctuation data group includes normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2,..., And normal fluctuation data m, and the reach effect data group includes reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2,. In the case of n, data output is sequentially performed in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 →... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, and subsequently reach effect data 1 → 2 → with the start of reach effect. ... → Data is sequentially output in the order of n.

  In the display setting process in step S3907, the stop symbol is also determined based on the symbol command. As described above, when “A1” is set in the symbol command, any combination of symbols 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 is determined as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when “A2” is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A3” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front / rear reach reach symbol buffer (see FIG. 31) of the RAM 553 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A4” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear deviation is determined as a stop symbol. When “A5” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely off symbol buffer is determined as a stop symbol.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 560, and starts variable display of symbols on the decorative symbol display device. Once the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 560 is used until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (until the variation time timer set in step S3907 becomes 0). And the display control device 45 cooperate with each other to continue the variable display of symbols.

  Here, an example of a normal display mode in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 will be described. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with three upper, middle and lower symbol display areas, and a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed for each symbol display area. The In the present embodiment, various symbols Z are displayed as decorative symbols with numbers “1” to “9”. The various symbols Z are scrolled and displayed from right to left with periodicity in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of symbol strings.

  In such a case, in the upper symbol row, various symbols Z are displayed in descending order (in the order in which the attached numbers decrease), and in the middle symbol row and the lower symbol row, the various symbols Z are also in ascending order (indicated numbers increase). Are displayed in order). Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area, and at the time of the stop, the symbol Z is, for example, a combination of jackpot symbols on a predetermined jackpot line (the same in this embodiment) The jackpot state is started when it is arranged with a combination of types of symbols). Note that immediately before the above-mentioned combination of jackpot symbols is displayed, a so-called reach state (reach state establishment state) is established. However, even if it reaches a reach state, it may not reach a big hit state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as five lines). Therefore, in the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows, when the same type of the various symbols Z is displayed in a fixed stop state along with any of the five lines, a big hit state occurs.

  In the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be in a power saving state in which light is reduced.

  As described above, normally, a bright and colorful image is displayed on the display unit 42a [see FIG. 34 (a)]. On the other hand, when the power saving state is entered, the luminance decreases, the display section 42a becomes dark and appears almost black, and the characters “power saving” are displayed at the center [FIG. 34 (b). reference〕. This display of “power saving” corresponds to the power saving notification display in the present embodiment.

  In the display setting process in step S3907, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a switching process for switching the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the power saving state is also performed.

  Here, the switching process according to the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S7001, the port corresponding to the power saving cancellation signal among the input / output ports 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the power saving cancellation signal is input from the main control device 261.

  Here, when the power saving release signal is input, it is considered that the player is playing the game by holding the handle 18 or has started the game, and the process proceeds to step S7006.

  On the other hand, when the power saving cancellation signal is not input, it is considered that the player is not playing a game, and the process proceeds to step S7002.

  In step S7002, it is determined whether or not the value of the predetermined measurement timer Ts is “1 minute” or more. The measurement timer Ts is for measuring the time that has passed without the new variable display effect or the like from the point in time when the variable display effect or the jackpot effect or the like is finished on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is. That is, in step S7002, it is determined whether or not “1 minute” or more has elapsed since the end of various display effects.

  If the determination is affirmative, the power saving level value stored in the power saving level value storage area of the RAM 553 is checked in step S7003, and the process proceeds to step S7004. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made, the present process is terminated as it is.

  In step S7004, it is determined whether the value of the power saving level checked in step S7003 is “1” or more.

  If the value of the power saving level is “1” or more, a power saving setting process is performed in step S7005, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the power saving level value is not “1” or more, that is, if the power saving level value is “0”, the process proceeds to step S7007.

  In the power saving setting process in step S7005, setting is made to put the decorative symbol display device 42 in a power saving state. Specifically, a display command for causing the display control device 45 to execute a process for setting the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to a power saving state (dimmed state) as shown in FIG. 34B is set. . At the same time, the power saving flag for determining that the power saving state is set is turned on. The display command set here is output to the display control device 45 in an external output process in step 3911 described later.

  In step S7006 which has shifted from step S7001, it is determined whether or not the display unit 42a is currently in a power saving state by looking at the on / off status of the power saving flag.

  If it is determined that power is being saved, a demo setting process is performed in step S7007, and the process ends. The series of processes constitutes the return means in this embodiment. On the other hand, if it is determined that power is not being saved, the process is terminated.

  In the demonstration setting process of step S7007, a display command for causing the display control apparatus 45 to execute a process for performing a demonstration display is set on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display apparatus 42. At the same time, the power saving flag is turned off. As described above, the display command set here is output to the display control device 45 in the external output process in step 3911.

  Also, in the display setting process of step S3907, the presence / absence of the operation of the effect button 125 is also confirmed. When the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, the display setting corresponding to this is also performed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 30, in the lamp setting process in step S3908, the lighting / flashing patterns of the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 are set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed in the decorative symbol display device 42 at the normal time. Various control settings for driving the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 are performed.

  In the lamp setting process in step S3908, similarly to the above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a switching process for switching the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 to the power saving state is also performed.

  Here, the switching process related to the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S7101, it is determined whether the power saving flag is on. If the power saving flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S7102, and if the power saving flag is not turned on, the power saving cancellation process is performed in step S7106, and then this process ends. By performing the power saving cancellation process, it is possible to perform normal control such as lighting / flashing control as described above with respect to the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2.

  In step S7102, as described above, it is determined whether or not the power saving level value stored in the power saving level value storage area of the RAM 553 is equal to or greater than “2”.

  If the value of the power saving level is “2” or more, a setting process for turning off the panel lamp group LG2 is performed in step S7103, and the process proceeds to step S7104. On the other hand, if the value of the power saving level is less than “2”, the present process is terminated as it is.

  In step S7104, it is determined whether or not the value of the power saving level is “3”. If the power saving level value is “3”, a setting process for turning off the frame lamp group LG1 is performed in step S7105, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the power saving level is less than “3”, the present process is terminated as it is.

  The function of executing the switching process related to the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the switching process related to the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 constitutes a power saving means in the present embodiment.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 30, in the sound setting processing in step S <b> 3909, various control settings for driving the speaker SP, such as setting of the output pattern of the speaker SP, etc. in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. I do. Here, the sound volume is set based on the value of the sound volume level stored in the power saving level value storage area of the RAM 553.

  In step 3911, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents in steps S3905 to 3910 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3911 performed every 1 msec is performed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3912, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3913, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3912 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3914. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  As described above in detail, in the present embodiment, the player does not operate the handle 18 (without playing a game), and various display effects are completed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. When “1 minute” or more has passed without the display effect being performed, the display unit 42a and the like of the decorative symbol display device 42 is in a power saving state. Thereby, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be saved.

  Moreover, since the volume power saving changeover switch SW is provided and the degree of power saving can be adjusted in multiple stages as necessary, it is possible to improve convenience for a game shop.

  Further, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the power saving state is configured to perform a power saving notification display of “power saving”. With this configuration, the player can grasp that the pachinko machine 10 has not failed.

  In addition, when the player touches the handle 18 in the power saving state, the power saving state is terminated, and a predetermined demonstration display is started on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. . During the power saving state, the player cannot grasp the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 42, but the player grasps the content of the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 only by touching the handle 18. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In the above embodiment, at least when the player does not operate the handle 18 and various display effects are finished on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, a new display effect is not performed. When one minute or more has elapsed, a predetermined condition is established in which the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 enters a power saving state.

  The predetermined condition for entering the power saving state is not limited to this, and may be other conditions. For example, an infrared sensor or the like that can detect that the player is seated and the like may be provided, and the predetermined condition for entering the power saving state may be that a predetermined time elapses after the player leaves the seat. Alternatively, the predetermined condition may be that a predetermined time elapses without a game ball entering the first opportunity corresponding port 33 (from the last entry to the first opportunity corresponding port 33). Of course, it is good also as a structure which combined several conditions like the said embodiment.

  (B) The “light emitting means” to be the power saving target is not limited to the display unit 42a, the frame lamp group LG1, and the panel lamp group LG2 of the decorative symbol display device 42 of the above embodiment, and light emitting means different from these. May be in a power saving state.

  For example, as the light emitting display means, a dot matrix, electroluminescence (EL), a rotating drum, and the like can be cited as an example in addition to the decorative symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device).

  Further, the type of light source (light emitting element) constituting the various light emitting means is not limited to the LED, and other types such as a light bulb and a fluorescent lamp may be employed.

  (C) In the power saving state of the above embodiment, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is dimmed and the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 are turned off. The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be turned off, and the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 may be dimmed.

  In addition, although it does not mention in particular in the said embodiment about the method of light reduction etc., various methods can be considered. For example, (1) changing the ratio of the lighting time and light-off time of a light emitting element such as an LED that blinks at high speed, (2) changing the current or voltage supplied to the light emitting element, (3) one light emitting means ( The number of light-emitting elements that are turned on simultaneously in an illumination device or the like) is changed.

  In addition, when dimming or the like in a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative design display device 42, for example, the display image is displayed with a higher luminance in addition to controlling the backlight by the above methods (1) to (3). A method of switching to a low image (black type or the like) can be considered.

  (D) In the above embodiment, the power saving state of the display unit 42a, the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 of the decorative symbol display device 42 is switched in three stages. It is good also as a structure which becomes a power-saving state collectively.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can switch the dimming degree of the display part 42a, the frame lamp group LG1, the panel surface lamp group LG2, etc. of the decorative design display apparatus 42 in steps.

  (E) In the above embodiment, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the power saving state is configured to perform the power saving notification display of “power saving”, but the content of the power saving notification display is different. It may be. Of course, the power saving notification display may be omitted.

  When the power saving notification is displayed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the power saving state, a predetermined image is displayed on the screen periodically or randomly in order to prevent the liquid crystal panel from being burned (screen saver). Is preferred). Here, when displaying a predetermined image at random, it is possible to use a random number generated by the sub-control device 560 or the like to determine a stop symbol or the like in order to simplify the processing. preferable.

  (F) In the above embodiment, when the player touches the handle 18 in the power saving state, the power saving state is terminated, and a predetermined demonstration display is started on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It has a configuration. For example, a configuration in which no demonstration display is performed may be employed. Further, when the player touches the handle 18 in the power saving state, the power saving state is terminated, and the symbol is stopped and displayed once on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 before the power saving state is entered. An image may be displayed, and then a demonstration display may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, a series of demonstration displays may be displayed from the beginning when the power saving state ends and the demonstration display is started on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is good also as displaying from the middle. Here, there are various configurations for displaying the demonstration display from the middle. For example, when a predetermined time elapses without performing a new display effect since the end of various display effects on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, whether or not it is in a power saving state. In addition to the display control process during power saving, the sub-control device 560 starts the display control process related to the demonstration display, and when it is not in the power saving state, this is output (displayed) on the display unit 42a. If it is in the middle, it may not be output (displayed) on the display unit 42a. When the power saving state is canceled in such a configuration, a demonstration display in which the control processing is already executed in the sub-control device 560 and the like is output (displayed) to the display unit 42a from the middle thereof. In addition, in a configuration in which a series of demonstration displays are executed by sequentially executing various programs in accordance with a predetermined time sequence, the elapsed time from the time when the previous display effect is finished is measured by a predetermined timer. The demonstration display may be executed from the portion corresponding to the timer value when the power saving state ends.

  (G) In the above-described embodiment, the sub-control device 560 is configured to control power saving. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, another control device such as the main control device 261 may control the power-saving.

  (H) In the above embodiment, when the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 are in the power saving state, they are simply turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group in the power saving state. In LG2, it is good also as a structure which performs predetermined lighting control or blink control regularly or randomly.

  (I) It is good also as a structure provided with the shielding member which can shield the display part 42a of the decorative design display apparatus 42 in a power-saving state. Such a shielding member is preferably used not only for power saving but also for a predetermined effect. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs the effect by a shielding member instead of or in addition to the demonstration display when the power saving state is canceled.

  Hereinafter, a configuration including a shielding member that shields the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 will be described using the shutter accessory 900 illustrated in FIGS. 37 to 41 as an example.

  The shutter accessory 900 is provided at a position above the display unit 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The shutter accessory 900 includes a set of shutter pieces 901 as a shielding member set, a slide member 902 as a power transmission member for driving them, and a motor unit 903 as a power source.

  The motor unit 903 includes a step motor and a gear mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor to the slide member 902. In FIGS. 37 to 41, only the gear mechanism is shown for convenience. Also, in FIG. 37 and the like, a dotted pattern is added to the portion of the shutter piece set 901 for easy understanding of the operation of the shutter piece set 901.

  The shutter piece set 901 is composed of five shutter pieces as shielding members. More specifically, a first shutter piece 901a pivotally supported on a casing as a base frame (not shown), a second shutter piece 901b assembled so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the first shutter piece 901a, 3 shutter pieces 901c, a fourth shutter piece 901d, and a fifth shutter piece 901e. Each of the shutter pieces 901a to 901e is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape.

  The shutter piece set 901 is assembled so that the shutter pieces 901a to 901e are overlapped in the front-rear direction. In normal times, the second to fifth shutter pieces 901b to 901e are on the back side of the first shutter piece 901a. (See FIG. 37).

  In the first shutter piece 901a, a rotating shaft portion 905 that is pivotally supported with respect to the casing (the front side in the drawing) is formed in the vicinity of a predetermined corner portion so as to protrude forward.

  On the other hand, the second to fifth shutter pieces 901b to 901e are slidably provided. Each of the shutter pieces 901a to 901e is provided with an engaging means for engaging with the adjacent shutter pieces. By these engagements, relative displacement of a predetermined amount or more between both adjacent shutter pieces is restricted, and the other can be operated by following (moving) one movement.

  The first shutter piece 901a is formed with a first engagement shaft portion 907 that protrudes rearward. The first engagement shaft portion 907 is loosely fitted in a first cam groove 909 described later formed in the slide member 902.

  The fifth shutter piece 901e is formed with a second engagement shaft portion 908 protruding rearward. The second engagement shaft portion 908 is loosely fitted in a second cam groove 910 described later formed in the slide member 902.

  Next, the slide member 902 for driving the shutter piece set 901 will be described in detail. The slite member 902 is formed in an elongated shape, and drives the shutter piece set 901 by a sliding operation along the horizontal direction.

  A first cam groove 909 and a second cam groove 910 are provided on the surface portion of the slide member 902.

  One end of the first engagement shaft portion 907 of the first shutter piece 901a is inserted into the first cam groove 909. One end of the second engagement shaft portion 908 of the fifth shutter piece 901e is inserted into the second cam groove 910.

  The first link mechanism configured by the first cam groove 909 and the first engagement shaft portion 907 is to integrally rotate and displace the shutter piece set 901 (shutter pieces 901a to 901e) around the rotation shaft portion 905. Mechanism.

  On the other hand, the second link mechanism constituted by the second cam groove 910 and the second engagement shaft portion 908 is configured such that the fifth shutter piece 901e and thus the second to fourth shutter pieces 901b to 901d are relative to the first shutter piece 901a. It is a mechanism for sliding displacement.

  Similarly to the above-described embodiment, the first cam groove 909 has an action section (an action section at the time of set rotation displacement) that acts on the first engagement shaft portion 907 when the shutter piece set 901 is integrally rotated and displaced. The fifth shutter piece 901e has a non-interference section (non-interference section at the time of relative displacement) that does not interfere with the first engagement shaft portion 907 (the power of the slide member 902 is not transmitted) when the fifth shutter piece 901e is relatively displaced.

  The second cam groove 910 has an action section (action section at the time of relative displacement) that acts on the second engagement shaft portion 908 when the fifth shutter piece 901e is relatively slid and displaced, and the shutter piece set 901 is integrally rotated and displaced. A non-interference section (non-interference section at the time of set rotation displacement) that does not interfere with the second engagement shaft portion 908 (the power of the slide member 902 is not transmitted).

  A gear portion 913 is formed on the upper side portion of the slide member 902 and meshes with the gear mechanism of the motor unit 903.

  Next, the operation of the shutter piece set 901 will be described. Normally, the shutter piece set 901 is held above the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in a state where the first to fifth shutter pieces 901a to 901e are superimposed (see FIG. 37). This state corresponds to the normal state (reference state) of the shutter piece set 901, and the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is fully opened.

  From this state, when the slide member 902 is slid leftward by the motor unit 903, the first engagement shaft portion 907 of the first shutter piece 901a located near the upper side of the slide member 902 is moved to the first cam. While being pushed leftward by the action section of the groove 909, it gradually moves to the lower side of the slide member 902 (see FIG. 38). As a result, the shutter piece set 901 (shutter pieces 901a to 901e) is integrally rotated and displaced in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation shaft portion 905, and jumps out to the front of the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It will be.

  At this time, the second engagement shaft portion 908 of the fifth shutter piece 901e moves along the non-interference section of the second cam groove 910 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the shutter piece set 901.

  When the slide member 902 slides by a predetermined amount, the tip of the shutter piece set 901 is directed downward, and the shutter piece set 901 is in a substantially vertical state (see FIG. 39).

  In this state, the first engagement shaft portion 907 of the first shutter piece 901a moves to the non-interference section of the first cam groove 909, and the second engagement shaft portion 908 of the fifth shutter piece 901e The cam groove 910 moves to the operating section.

  From this point, when the slide member 902 continues to move leftward, the second engagement shaft portion 908 of the fifth shutter piece 901e is pushed leftward by the action section of the second cam groove 910. Then, the fifth shutter piece 901e is pulled out from the back side of the first shutter piece 901a while the first shutter piece 901a is held in the vertical state (see FIG. 40).

  When the slide member 902 continues to move in the left direction, the fourth shutter piece 901d is pulled out from the back side of the first shutter piece 901a so as to be pulled by the fifth shutter piece 901e, and is pulled by the fourth shutter piece 901d. In this way, the third shutter piece 901c is pulled out, and the second shutter piece 901b is pulled out so as to be pulled by the third shutter piece 901c (see FIG. 41). If it will be in this state, the display part 42a of the decoration symbol display apparatus 42 will be in a fully closed state.

  When the power saving state ends and the shutter piece set 901 returns to the original state, the procedure reverse to the above procedure is followed.

  (J) In the above embodiment, a rotary type switch is adopted as the volume power saving switching switch SW, but other types of switches such as a slide type may be adopted. Further, the position where the volume power saving changeover switch SW is provided is not limited to the sub-control device 560, and may be provided at another position. Further, the switching operation means capable of switching whether or not to enter the power saving state may be omitted, and the power saving state may be always established when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  (K) You may implement as a different type of pachinko machine from the above-mentioned embodiment. In addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as an arrangement ball machine, various game machines such as a sparrow ball, and a revolving game machine such as a slot machine.

  (L) In the above embodiment, when the player touches the handle 18 as the return operation means in the power saving state, that is, a signal indicating that the player has touched the handle 18 is input from the touch sensor 451 to the main controller 261. On the condition that the power saving cancellation signal is output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 560, the power saving state ends and the normal state is restored.

  The condition for returning from the power saving state to the normal state is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the operation of the handle 18, the power saving state may be terminated when the sub control device 560 detects that the effect button 125 has been operated. In addition, a dedicated operation unit, a sensor, or the like may be provided as a return operation unit for returning from the power saving state to the normal state, and the return process may be performed based on detection of the player by the operation unit, the sensor, or the like. In addition, it is configured to return when an instruction signal is input from the management device of the amusement store or when a predetermined time elapses from the point of entering the power saving state, regardless of the detection of the operation means or the sensor. Also good.

  (M) The display unit 42a, the frame lamp group LG1, and the panel lamp group LG2 of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be gradually restored from the power saving state. For example, the following structure is mentioned as an example. If the player touches the handle 18 when everything is in the power saving state, only the decorative symbol display device 42 is set to the normal state while maintaining the power saving state of the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2. Return. Thereafter, when a signal indicating that the player has touched the handle 18 for a predetermined period is continuously input from the touch sensor 451 to the main controller 261, the panel lamp group LG2 is returned. On the other hand, if the signal has not been input to the main control device 261 for a predetermined period of time, the decorative symbol display device 42 is again set in the power saving state. Further, when a signal indicating that the player has touched the handle 18 for a predetermined period is continuously input from the touch sensor 451 to the main controller 261 from the state in which the panel lamp group LG2 is returned, The lamp group LG1 is returned, and when the signal is not continuously input to the main controller 261 for a predetermined period, the panel lamp group LG2 is again set in the power saving state.

  Hereinafter, the technical idea that is not described in the claims and that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described together with the effects thereof.

Means 1. A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
At least one light emitting means;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a power saving means for setting the light emitting means to a power saving state in which the light emitting means is dimmed or extinguished,
A gaming machine comprising switching operation means capable of switching at least whether or not to enter the power saving state.

  According to the means 1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, a situation where there is no player continues for a predetermined time, the predetermined light-emitting means is dimmed or turned off. Thereby, the power consumption of the gaming machine can be saved.

  On the other hand, there is a desire for an amusement shop that conducts business to attract more customers to gaming machines. In this regard, by providing the switching operation means, it is possible to switch whether or not to enter the power saving state as necessary, so that it is possible to improve convenience for the game shop.

  Note that “establishment of the predetermined condition” includes, for example, “a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time point”. Specifically, “a predetermined time has elapsed since the time when the variable display was stopped in the predetermined display means”, “a predetermined time from the time when the presence, operation or action of the player is no longer detected by the predetermined detection means” Elapse ".

  The “light emitting means” includes, for example, “a liquid crystal display having a liquid crystal panel and a backlight for illuminating it” as well as “an electric decoration device including a light emitting element such as an LED and a cover member such as a lens covering the light emitting element”. “Light-emitting display means” such as “apparatus” is also included.

  Further, “dimming” means a state in which “light irradiation amount per unit time”, “luminance”, “brightness”, and the like are reduced more than usual.

  Mean 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the power saving means and the switching operation means are configured to be capable of switching the power saving state in stages.

  According to the above means 2, since the degree of power saving can be adjusted as necessary, the convenience can be further improved.

  Here, “the power saving state can be switched in stages” means that, for example, the number of light-emitting means to be turned off among a plurality of light-emitting means can be switched in stages, and the dimming degree of the light-emitting means to be dimmed Switching is possible.

  Means 3. The gaming machine according to means 1 or 2, further comprising a liquid crystal display device having a display unit made of a liquid crystal panel as the light emitting means.

  In recent years, a liquid crystal display device is often employed as a display device such as a pachinko machine, and the liquid crystal screen tends to be enlarged, so that the effect is extremely great just by saving the display device.

  Means 4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein a power saving notification display for notifying that the power saving state is in effect is performed on a display unit of the liquid crystal display device in the power saving state.

  If the display unit of the liquid crystal display device is in a light-saving state such as dimming, some players may misunderstand that it is out of order and some players may not play games on the gaming machine. is there. In this regard, the gaming machine breaks down by performing a power saving notification display for notifying that the power saving state is present, for example, displaying “power saving” on the display unit of the liquid crystal display device as in the above means 4. This makes it possible for the player to grasp that the problem has not occurred, and to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem.

  Means 5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the liquid crystal display device in the power saving state on a regular or random basis (a screen saver is activated).

  If the gaming machine is not used for a long time with the power saving notification display informing that it is in the power saving state, such as displaying “power saving” on the display unit of the liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal panel will be burned out. Is a problem. In this regard, according to the means 5, the occurrence of the malfunction can be suppressed.

  In the case of “displaying a predetermined image in a random manner”, a random number generated in a predetermined control device can be used. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, random number update processing is always performed due to the characteristics of gaming machines that perform various lotteries, so that the above processing is performed like a personal computer by using this. Therefore, there is no need to bother generating random numbers, and the processing can be simplified.

  Means 6. The gaming machine according to any one of means 3 to 5, further comprising a shielding member capable of shielding a display portion of the liquid crystal display device in the power saving state.

  According to the means 6, even when the display unit is completely turned off without performing the power saving notification display as in the means 4 or the image operation display as in the means 5 during power saving, the player is in trouble. The occurrence of problems such as misunderstandings and burn-in of the liquid crystal panel can be reduced.

  Mean 7 In the power saving state, when a predetermined return condition is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined detection signal is input from a predetermined detection means), the power saving state is terminated, and a predetermined portion is displayed on the display unit of the liquid crystal display device. The gaming machine according to any one of means 3 to 6, wherein a demonstration display is executed.

  During the power saving state, the player cannot grasp the effect performed on the display device, but according to the above means 7, for example, the user can grasp the contents of the effect performed on the display device only by touching a predetermined operation means or the like. can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

When starting the demonstration display, a series of demonstration displays may be displayed from the beginning or may be displayed from the middle.
For example, “When a predetermined time has elapsed without performing a new display effect since the end of various display effects in the display unit of the liquid crystal display device, regardless of whether or not it is in a power saving state, When the display control means according to the liquid crystal display device starts the display control process according to the demonstration display and is not in the power saving state, the demonstration display is displayed on the display unit, and when the power saving state is in effect, The demonstration display may not be displayed on the display unit ”. Further, in such a configuration, “when the power saving state is released, the demonstration display in which the control processing has already been executed in the display control means is displayed on the display unit in the middle” may be adopted. .

  Further, “in the power saving state, when a predetermined return condition is satisfied, the power saving state is terminated, and a display image displayed before the power saving state is temporarily displayed on the display unit of the liquid crystal display device is displayed. The demonstration display may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Means 8. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7, wherein the lighting means in the power saving state performs predetermined lighting control or blinking control periodically or randomly.

  According to the means 8, the same effect as that of the means 4 can be obtained.

  Means 9. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8, further comprising return means for ending the power saving state and returning to a normal state when a predetermined return condition is satisfied in the power saving state.

  According to the means 9, by providing the return means, it is possible to improve convenience for a game store or a player.

  Here, the “return condition” is satisfied by, for example, “when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power saving state is reached”, “when a predetermined detection signal is input from a predetermined detection means (from the management device of the amusement store). Including the input of an instruction signal).

Means 10. Comprising a return operation means for ending the power saving state and returning to a normal state;
The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the return condition is established by operating the return operation means.

  According to the means 10, the player or the store clerk or the like can end the power saving state by his / her own operation without being based on an instruction from the management computer or the like of the game store, thereby further improving convenience. Can do. The “return operation means” includes, for example, a launch handle, an effect button, and the like. Of course, a dedicated button or the like may be provided.

Means 11. A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
At least one light emitting means;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a power saving means for setting the light emitting means to a power saving state in which the light emitting means is dimmed or extinguished,
A gaming machine comprising a return means for ending the power saving state and returning to a normal state when a predetermined return condition is satisfied in the power saving state.

  According to the means 11, the same operational effects as the means 1 and means 9 (excluding the effect of the switching operation means) are exhibited. Therefore, regarding the configuration related to the power saving state, the same configuration as the above-described units 3 to 6 and 8 can be subordinated to the configuration of the unit 11.

Means 12. Comprising a return operation means for ending the power saving state and returning to a normal state;
The gaming machine according to claim 11, wherein the return condition is satisfied by operating the return operation means.

  According to the means 11, the same effect as that of the means 10 is obtained.

  Means 13. The gaming machine according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the return means is configured to be able to return from the power saving state to the normal state in a stepwise manner.

  For example, in the case where a player touches a gaming machine to check the game contents but actually does not play a game in the gaming machine, it is inefficient to cancel and restore the entire power saving state. For example, if the player is only to confirm the game contents, only a part of the power saving state such as a display device may be canceled and restored. In this regard, according to the present means, the occurrence of such a problem can be suppressed by adopting a configuration that can be restored in stages, such as by releasing and restoring the power saving state part by part.

Means 14. As the light emitting means, a display device having a predetermined display unit,
Any of the means 11 to 13, wherein when a predetermined return condition is satisfied in the power saving state, the power saving state is terminated, and a predetermined demonstration display is executed on the display unit of the display device. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the means 14, the same effect as that of the means 7 is achieved.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  A. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A ball ball game machine including a game area where a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general prize opening, variable prize winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

  B. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the above ball game machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

  C. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). A spinning-type gaming machine configured to be given game value on condition that the information is specific identification information.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 18 ... Handle, 42 ... Decorative design display device, 42a ... Display part, 57 ... Center lamp, 58, 59 ... Side lamp, 102 ... Side lamp, 103 ... Top lamp, 104 ... Corner lamp, 261 ... Main control device, 451 ... touch sensor, 560 ... sub-control device, LG1 ... frame lamp group, LG2 ... panel lamp group, SW ... volume power saving changeover switch.

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has many light emitting means such as a liquid crystal display device that performs a symbol variation display and an electric decoration device that includes a large number of light emitting elements such as LEDs in order to enhance the decoration effect and the production effect. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-102937 A

However, a display device or illumination device, such as a pachinko machine, and the like are always lit or blinking. Therefore, the power consumption of the gaming machine has become a considerable amount, and power adjustment (power consumption adjustment ) has been desired .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of adjusting power consumption.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is:
A control device having control means for controlling the game, and an encapsulating member for encapsulating the control means in an accommodation state;
A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
At least one light emitting means controlled by the control device ;
Provided in the control device, comprising switching operation means electrically connected in the control member and the encapsulating member,
The control means includes
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the power adjusting means for setting the light emitting means to a power saving state in which the light emitting means is dimmed or extinguished,
An operation detecting means capable of detecting the operation of the switching operation means,
The gist of the invention is that the process of switching the power adjustment level by the power adjustment means to the power adjustment level designated by the switching operation means can be executed .

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to claim 2 is:
A first control device having first control means for controlling a game, and a first encapsulating member for encapsulating the first control means in an accommodation state;
A second control unit having a second control unit operable based on a command output from the first control unit, and a second encapsulating member that encapsulates the second control unit in an accommodation state;
A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
At least one light emitting means controlled by the second control device ;
Provided in the second control device, comprising switching operation means electrically connected in the second control means and the second enveloping member,
The second control means includes
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the power adjusting means for setting the light emitting means to a power saving state in which the light emitting means is dimmed or extinguished,
An operation detecting means capable of detecting the operation of the switching operation means,
The gist of the invention is that the process of switching the power adjustment level by the power adjustment means to the power adjustment level designated by the switching operation means can be executed .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is an excellent effect that power consumption can be adjusted .

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a back perspective view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows an electric structure. It is a rear view of the game board which shows the state by which various cable connectors were wired. It is a back perspective view of a game board showing the state where various cable connectors were wired. (A) is a schematic plan view of the volume power saving changeover switch, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the scale value of the volume power saving changeover switch, the volume level, and the power saving level. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd opportunity corresponding | compatible opening passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing which shows various table structures. It is a flowchart which shows a variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an opportunity corresponding | compatible opening / closing control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decoration design. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of an off symbol counter. It is explanatory drawing which shows a table structure. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the aspect of the display part in the normal time, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the aspect of the display part at the time of power saving. It is a flowchart which shows the switching process which concerns on the display part of a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the switching process which concerns on a lamp group. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a shutter accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a shutter accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a shutter accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a shutter accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a shutter accessory.

  As described above, conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, in order to enhance the decoration effect and the production effect, a liquid crystal display device that performs symbol variation display, etc. Many various light emission means are provided (for example, refer patent document 1).

  However, a display device such as a pachinko machine or an illumination device is always lit and blinked so as to make the customer interested in the game even when the player is not playing the game. For this reason, the power consumption of the gaming machine has become a considerable amount, and power saving (saving of power consumption) has been desired.

  In recent years, there has been a risk that the above-described problems may become more conspicuous due to an increase in the number of installed light emitting elements, an increase in luminance, an increase in the size of a liquid crystal screen, or the like.

  However, simply reducing the number of installed light-emitting elements or changing the light-emitting elements to ones with low brightness will reduce the decoration and production effects of light, making it inferior to other types of gaming machines. There is also a risk that it may be lost or gameability may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of saving power consumption.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. However, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories placed on the surface of the game board 30, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. ing. The outer frame 11 is formed in a rectangular shape as a whole by, for example, a wooden plate material, and each plate material is assembled by a detachable fastener such as a small screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are provided on the left side of the outer frame 11. The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so as to be rotatable, thereby supporting the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. For convenience, although not shown, a pair of upper and lower receiving brackets to which a locking member of a locking device 600 described later is locked are attached to the right side portion of the outer frame 11. Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 85 is attached to the lower part of the outer frame 11.

  The opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. Yes. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a blue resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  On the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball receiving tray is provided at the center of the lower portion thereof, so that game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

  A game ball launching handle (hereinafter simply referred to as a handle) 18 projecting toward the front side is provided on the right side of the lower plate 15, and an ashtray 26 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15. The handle 18 includes a touch sensor 451 as a touch detection unit that detects contact of the player, a variable resistor 445 as an operation amount detection unit for detecting an operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18, and a game A stop switch 455 for stopping the launch of the sphere is provided (see FIG. 8).

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as launching device) 70 while aligning them in a row. The game ball overflowing from the upper plate 19 is guided to the lower plate 15.

  The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with a bill or a card inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, according to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lending to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine.

  In addition, an effect button 125 is provided in front of the upper plate 19, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect is performed on a decorative symbol display device 42, which will be described later, or the contents of the effect are changed. Or

  In addition, an electric decoration device such as various lamps is provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These lighting devices play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode according to the change of the game state mainly at the time of big hit or at the time of predetermined reach.

  For example, a side lamp 102 is provided on the periphery of the window 101, a top lamp 103 is provided in the upper center, and a corner lamp 104 is provided in the left and right upper corners. Each of the lamps 102 to 104 incorporates a light emitting source such as an LED, a control board for driving the LED, and the like.

  Among these, the top lamp 103 functions as a jackpot lamp, and lights and blinks at the time of jackpot to notify that the jackpot is being hit. The corner lamp 104 functions as an error display lamp and lights up when a predetermined error occurs.

  Hereinafter, the side lamp 102, the top lamp 103, and the corner lamp 104 are collectively referred to as a frame lamp group LG1 unless otherwise mentioned.

  A speaker SP (see FIG. 8) is provided adjacent to each corner lamp 104, and a speaker cover 24 is attached to the front side of the speaker SP.

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached to the front and back of the glass unit 137, but is attached in a round shape as a whole and assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame and the game board.

  As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached in a state in which the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

  Further, a bulging portion 40 bulging rearward is formed at a lower portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window hole 39 (game board 30). A launching device 70 is attached to the front right side of the bulging portion 40. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is adopted as the firing device 70. Further, the bulging portion 40 is provided with a ball passage 71 that leads from a later-described payout mechanism portion 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15. Further, there is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 70a of the launching device 70 and a rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52) described later, and a foul ball passage 72 is formed below this gap. As a result, if the game ball launched from the launching device 70 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 described later and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 and the ball passage 71. It is discharged to the lower tray 15 via A harness cover 74 is provided below the ball passage 71. Thereby, a harness (not shown) for connecting the relay substrate 75 and the launching device 70 is gathered.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 700 exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and the inner frame 12 can be unlocked by inserting a key into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotating it to one side. The front frame set 14 and the back pack unit 203 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 and the back pack unit 203 are locked to the inner frame 12.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a first opportunity corresponding port (operating port) 33, a second opportunity corresponding port 34, a variable display unit 35, and the like in a through hole formed by router processing. The game board 30 is attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, and the first opportunity corresponding opening 33, the upper plate 19 (or the A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the lower plate 15). In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not won a prize in various winning units (general winning port 31, variable winning device 32, first opportunity corresponding port 33) as a means for entering a ball. Is discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills (servants).

  Then, a jackpot lottery is performed when a game ball enters the first opportunity corresponding port 33, and when a winning result is obtained by the jackpot lottery, a jackpot state as a special gaming state occurs.

  Further, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is provided with a pair of opening and closing members, and the opening and closing members are configured to open and close in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition. Thereby, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 can be switched between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. The first opportunity corresponding port 33 is, for example, when the opening / closing member is in an open state in the normal mode and a specified time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed, or when a specified number (for example, 1) of game balls have entered. It will be closed. This opening / closing process is performed only once in the normal mode.

  The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that variably displays with the passage of the second opportunity corresponding port 34 as a trigger, a special display device 43 that variably displays with a winning at the first opportunity corresponding port 33 as a trigger, A decorative symbol display device 42 is provided as a variable display device that performs variable display in accordance with the variable display by the special display device 43.

  The normal symbol display device 41 incorporates a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs), and the lighting display mode is switched and displayed (variable display) every time the game ball passes through the second opportunity corresponding port 34. Specifically, “O” or “X” can be lit and displayed as a normal symbol, and for example, the normal symbol is changed from “O” to “X” every time the game ball passes through the second opportunity corresponding port 34. → "○" → ... The display is changed at high speed (variable display), and the first opportunity corresponding port 33 (opening / closing member) is displayed when the change display stops for several seconds with the "○" symbol (winning symbol) Is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the second opportunity corresponding port 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for that time is the fluctuation display being performed at that time. It is the structure performed after the end of. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 44. Yes.

  The special display device 43 includes a plurality of light emitting units provided on the side of the normal symbol display device 41. Specifically, it is composed of three-color light-emitting diodes (three-color LEDs) having red, green, and blue emission colors, and the color of the light-emitting portion is switched each time the game ball passes through the first opportunity corresponding port 33. (Variable display). Then, whether or not it is a big hit is definitely displayed by the color of the light emitting section that is lit when the variable display is stopped. The display content of the special display device 43 is also directly controlled by the main control device 261.

  Further, when a game ball is newly won in the first opportunity corresponding port 33 during the variable display of the special display device 43, the corresponding variable display is performed after the end of the variable display at that time. It has a configuration. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 46. Yes. In addition, when a new game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding port 33 during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 560 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, auxiliary display content is displayed by the sub control device 560 based on a command (command signal) from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the special display device 43. Is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 described later.

  In the display part 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, three symbol display areas, upper, middle and lower, are set. A plurality of symbols are scrolled and displayed in each symbol display area, and then stopped and displayed in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area.

  The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and is in an open state in which a game ball is likely to win in the case of a big hit (occurrence of a special game state).

  More specifically, when a game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding port 33, the special display device 43 displays the three-color LED at a high speed, such as red → green → blue → red →. When a predetermined time elapses, it is determined and displayed in one of the colors. High-speed color change display means, for example, that red, green, and blue are displayed in order every 4 msec. At this time, a special gaming state occurs when the decision display is made in red or green (for example, when it is stopped for a few seconds), that is, when a big win lottery is won. Here, red or green is a display showing a big hit. In particular, red is a display indicating that the game mode after the jackpot ends is a high probability mode described later, and green is a display indicating that the game mode after the jackpot ends is a time reduction mode described later. For this reason, when the special display device 43 determines and displays the three-color LEDs in red or green, a combination of specific symbols is supplementarily displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. The large winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is in a predetermined open state, and the game ball is configured to be in a state where it is easy to win a prize (a big hit state). More specifically, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is regarded as one round (special prize state), and the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Is done.

  Further, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 for guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 70 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game balls launched in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the rails 50 into the game area formed on the game board surface. The rail 50 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51. This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the upper part of the game board 30 returns to the rail 50 again.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right part of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right part of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, the parallel part of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 is excluded.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an electric decoration device such as various lamps. These lighting devices play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode according to the change of the game state mainly at the time of big hit or at the time of predetermined reach.

  For example, a center lamp 57 is provided on the periphery of the center frame 47, and side lamps 58 and 59 are provided on the left and right lower portions of the game board 30 (game area). Each of the lamps 57 to 59 incorporates a light emitting source such as an LED, a control board for driving the LED, and the like.

  Hereinafter, the center lamp 57 and the side lamps 58 and 59 are collectively referred to as a panel lamp group LG2 unless otherwise mentioned.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a rear view showing the configuration of the game board, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view thereof. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine.

  Various control boards are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up and down and left and right and partially overlapped in the front and back. Furthermore, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls, a protective cover made of resin, and the like are attached. In this embodiment, various control boards are divided into two mounting bases to form two control board units, and these control board units are individually attached to the inner frame 12 or the back of the game board 30. Yes. In this case, only the main board as the main control board is mounted on one mounting base to form a unit, and the dispensing control board, launch control board and power supply board are mounted on the other mounting base to form a unit. Here, for convenience, the former unit is referred to as “first control board unit 201”, and the latter unit is referred to as “second control board unit 202”. In addition, since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”. The detailed configuration of each unit 201 to 203 will be described later. The first control board unit 201, the second control board unit 202, and the back pack unit 203 are configured to be detachable in units, and further, a support shaft is provided in part to provide the inner frame 12 or game board. 30 is configured to be openable and closable with respect to the back surface.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As described above, the variable display device unit 35 is disposed in the center of the game board 30 with respect to the through hole formed by router processing.

  A resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided at the rear of the variable display device unit 35 so as to protrude rearward. However, in the present embodiment, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30 and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30 so that the variable display device unit 35 is integrated. ing. A decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device and a display control device 45 are attached to the rear end of the frame cover 213 in a state where they are overlapped and integrated (unitized). Further, a sub-control device 560 is attached to the back side of the display control device 45.

  The display control device 45 includes a display control board 650 (see FIG. 8) on which various electronic components are mounted. The display control board 650 is configured to be accommodated in a board box 651 made of a transparent resin material or the like. Yes.

  A terminal portion window 660 for exposing terminal portions (substrate side connectors) 658 and 659 provided on the display control substrate 650 to the outside is formed on the back surface portion of the substrate box 651. Via this terminal portion window 660, connectors of cable connectors C2 and C4, which will be described later, can be inserted and removed from the outside of the display control device 45 to the terminal portions 658 and 659 of the display control board 650.

  Various electronic components such as a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, and a VDP 526, which will be described later, are mounted on the display control board 650. In addition, the display control board 650 is electrically connected to the decorative design display device (liquid crystal display) 42 through a cable connector (not shown) via the output port 529.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control device 560 is placed on the back surface of the substrate box 651.

  As will be described later, the sub control device 560 stores a CPU that controls various effects according to instructions from the main control device 261 (main board 262), a ROM that stores various programs, and necessary data according to the progress of the game. Sub-control board 561 including a RAM, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. (see FIG. 8) The sub-control board 561 is configured to be accommodated in a board box 562 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

  A sub relay board 570 (see FIG. 8) is mounted on the back side of the board box 562, and power supplied from a power board 313a described later is connected to the sub control device 560 and the sub control board 560 via the sub relay board 570. It is supplied to the display control device 45.

  More specifically, the sub-relay board 570 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) 571, 572, and 573 for connecting connectors of various cable connectors described later along the left-right direction. Each of the terminal portions 571 to 573 is formed to protrude from the sub relay board 570. Correspondingly, a concave portion (retraction portion) 574 is formed in the lower portion of the substrate box 562 of the sub-control device 560. The terminal portions 571, 572, and 573 are exposed to the outside of the substrate box 562 through the holes opened in the concave portion 574.

  As shown in FIGS. 7, 9, and 10, a power supply cable connector C <b> 1 is connected to the terminal portion 571. The other end of the cable connector C1 is connected to a terminal portion (board-side connector) 590 of the power supply device 313. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the game board 30 showing a state in which various cable connectors are wired, and FIG. 10 is a perspective view thereof. 5 and 6 and the like, the illustration of each cable connector is omitted for the sake of convenience, and the main cable connectors C1 to C10 are shown only in FIGS. 7, 9, and 10, but of course, the pachinko machine 10 In addition to this, many cable connectors are wired.

  A cable connector C2 for supplying power is connected to the terminal portion 572. The other end of the cable connector C2 is connected to a terminal portion 659 of the display control device 45. That is, power is supplied to the display control device 45 via the sub relay board 570.

  A cable connector C3 for command signals (command signals) is connected to the terminal portion 573. The other end of the cable connector C3 is connected to the terminal portion 702 of the main controller 261.

  In addition, a connector (not shown) serving as an insertion portion protrudes upward from the upper edge portion of the sub-relay board 570, and the corresponding lower edge portion of the sub-control board 561 is connected to the connector. A connector (not shown) that serves as an insertion port is provided so as to face downward. When the sub control board 561 and the sub relay board 570 are mounted on the board box 562, the connector on the sub relay board 570 side is inserted into the connector on the sub control board 561 side, so that both are electrically connected. . These connectors are for power supply and for command signals (command signals). That is, a command (command signal) is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 560 via the sub relay board 570.

  Note that the normal symbol display device 41 and the special display device 43 are also electrically connected to the sub-relay board 570 (see FIG. 8). The main control device 261 outputs a control signal and the like to the normal symbol display device 41 and the special display device 43 via the cable connector C3, that is, the sub relay board 570. Therefore, the normal symbol display device 41 and the special display device 43 are directly controlled by the main control device 261 without using the sub control board 561.

  On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 560 (sub-control board 561). More specifically, a terminal portion (board-side connector) 579 for a command signal (command signal) is provided in the vicinity of the upper right end portion of the sub-control board 561. Correspondingly, an opening 580 is formed in the vicinity of the upper right end portion of the substrate box 562 of the sub-control device 560, and the terminal portion 579 is exposed to the outside of the substrate box 562 through the opening 580. A cable connector C4 for command signal (command signal) is connected to the terminal portion 579 (see FIG. 9 and the like). The terminal portion 658 of the display control device 45 is connected to the other end of the cable connector C4. As can be seen from FIG. 9 and the like, in this embodiment, the terminal portion 579 of the sub-control device 560 and the terminal portion 658 of the display control device 45 are provided at relatively close positions, and the cable connector C4 is a relatively cable. The short one is used. This is to suppress illegal acts such as so-called “hanging”.

  Now, returning to the description of FIG. 5, a back frame set 215 is attached to the back surface of the game board 30 below the frame cover 213. The back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the first control board unit 201 and includes a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, although illustration is omitted.

  In the second control board unit 202 located below the first control board unit 201, as shown in FIG. 7, a discharge passage portion 217 is formed at a position below the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215. A discharge chute 218 for discharging discharge balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed in the discharge passage portion 217. Accordingly, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 31 and the like are gathered via the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute 218 of the discharge passage portion 217. Similarly, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won any winning port is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute 218.

  Further, a detection switch or the like as a ball entry detection means for detecting the passage of game balls such as various winning holes is provided on the back surface of the game board 30. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning port switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning port 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. The count switch 223 is a switch that counts the game balls won in the variable winning device 32. Further, a first opportunity corresponding port (starting port) switch 224 is provided at a position corresponding to the first opportunity corresponding port 33, and a second opportunity corresponding port (gate) switch is provided at a position corresponding to the second opportunity corresponding port 34. 225 is provided.

  The winning port switch 221, the count switch 223, the first opportunity corresponding port switch 224, and the second opportunity corresponding port switch 225 are connected to a first board surface relay board (not shown) via a cable connector. It is connected to a main board 262 (main control device 261) described later via a cable connector C6 (see FIG. 9 and the like).

  Although not shown in the drawings, the variable winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid as a driving means for opening the large winning opening, and the first opportunity corresponding opening 33 is used to open the electric accessory. A first opportunity corresponding port (starting port) solenoid is provided as a driving means. The large winning opening solenoid and the first opportunity corresponding opening (starting opening) solenoid are connected to a second board relay board (not shown) via a cable connector, and this second board relay board is also connected to the main board via the cable connector C7. 262 (see FIG. 9 and the like).

  The detection results detected by the detection switches are taken into a main board 262 (main control device 261), which will be described later, and a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation each time from the main board 262. Is transmitted to the payout control board 311a (see FIG. 8). Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control board 311a. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball is electrically sensed for each of the various winning openings, and the payout is immediately performed.

  The main control device 261 provided in the first control board unit 201 includes a CPU that performs main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, and communication with various devices. And a main board 262 (see FIG. 8) including a random number generator used for various lotteries, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and the like. A substrate 262 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

  The board box 263 includes a box base 265 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover 266 that covers the box base 265 (see FIG. 6 and the like).

  Further, the box base 265 and the box cover 266 are connected by left and right sealing units 264A and 264B. When the substrate box 263 is opened, a predetermined trace is left in the sealing units 264A and 264B. ing. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened. Sealing units in the present embodiment are configured by the sealing units 264A and 264B.

  As long as the sealing units 264A and 264B are configured to connect the box base 265 and the box cover 266 so that they cannot be opened, in the present embodiment, the sealing unit 264A on the left side is connected to three sealing members. The right sealing unit 264B has a configuration in which two sealing members are connected. The box base 265 and the box cover 266 are connected to each other so that they cannot be opened by inserting locking claws into the long holes of the sealing members. Sealing processing by the sealing units 264A, 264B prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed, Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening / sealing process again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into the long hole of at least one sealing member among the three or two sealing members constituting the sealing units 264A and 264B. And when opening the board | substrate box 263 by the malfunction of the accommodated main board | substrate 262 etc., the connection of the sealing member in which the latching claw was inserted, and another sealing member is cut | disconnected. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing members. If the history of opening the board box 263 is left in the board box 263, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 263.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) 701, 702, 703, 704 for connecting connectors of various cable connectors are provided in the vicinity of the upper edge portion of the main board 262. It is arranged along the left-right direction. Each of the terminal portions 701 to 704 protrudes from the main substrate 262 and is exposed to the outside of the substrate box 263 through a hole opening in a recess (retractable portion) 266a formed in the upper portion of the box cover 266. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, a cable connector C <b> 5 connected to the launch control device 312 is connected to the terminal portion 701. A cable connector C3 connected to the sub relay board 570 is connected to the terminal portion 702. Connected to the terminal portion 703 is a cable connector C6 connected to the first board surface relay board that performs a relay function with the prize opening switch 221 and the like. Connected to the terminal portion 704 is a cable connector C7 connected to the second board surface relay board that performs a relay function with a prize winning solenoid or a first opportunity corresponding solenoid.

  A plurality of terminal portions (substrate-side connectors) 705 and 706 for connecting connectors of various cable connectors are also provided near the lower edge portion of the main substrate 262. The terminal portions 705 and 706 are formed to protrude from the main substrate 262 and are exposed to the outside of the substrate box 263 through holes formed in the lower portion of the box cover 266.

  A cable connector C8 for supplying power is connected to the terminal portion 705. The other end of the cable connector C8 is connected to the terminal portion 591 of the power supply device 313.

  A cable connector C9 for command signals is connected to the terminal portion 706. The other end of the cable connector C9 is connected to the terminal portion 592 of the payout control device 311. As a result, a command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311 via the cable connector C9.

  As can be seen from FIG. 9 and the like, in this embodiment, the terminal portion 702 of the main board 262 and the terminal portion 573 of the sub relay board 570 are provided at relatively close positions, and the cable connector C3 is relatively A cable with a short cable length is used. This is to suppress illegal acts such as so-called “hanging”.

  The base portion 201a of the first control board unit 201 attached to the back frame set 215 is provided with the board mounting portion 201b on which the main controller 261 is mounted separated from the back frame set 215. A gap is formed in. That is, in a state where the first control board unit 201 is mounted on the game board 30 (back frame set 215), a space is secured behind the board mounting portion 201b, and the variable winning device 32 and its electrical wiring can be installed without difficulty. It is like that. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9 and the like, the power supply cable connector C1 that connects the sub-relay board 570 and the power supply device 313 passes through this gap. For this reason, the main controller 261 is covered by the cable connector C1, and the visibility inside the main controller 261 is not hindered. As a result, early detection of fraud etc. becomes possible.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 7, the second control board unit 202 includes a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314. The payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, and the power supply device 313 are equipped with a control board including a central control CPU, ROM, RAM, various ports and the like as is well known. The board 311a (see FIG. 8) controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls. In addition, the launch control board of the launch control apparatus 312 controls the launch apparatus and the like according to the player's operation of the handle 18, and the power board 313a (see FIG. 8) of the power supply apparatus 313 requires predetermined control equipment and the like. Is generated and output.

  The payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, and the power supply device 313 are also configured such that corresponding control boards are accommodated in the board boxes 315, 316, and 317. However, the launch control device 312 (substrate box 316) is disposed behind the power supply device 313 (substrate box 317). Further, the substrate box 315 in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing unit in the same manner as the main control device 261 described above, so that a trace of opening the substrate box 315 remains.

  The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogged in the payout motor unit, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  A plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) 592 and 593 for connecting connectors of various cable connectors are also provided in the vicinity of the upper edge portion of the payout control board 311a. Each of the terminal portions 592 and 593 protrudes from the dispensing control board 311a and is exposed to the outside of the board box 315 through a hole opened at the top of the board box 315.

  The terminal portion 592 is electrically connected to the terminal portion 706 of the main controller 261 via the cable connector C9 as described above.

  On the other hand, a cable connector C10 for power supply is connected to the terminal portion 593. The other end of the cable connector C10 is connected to a terminal portion (not shown) of the power supply device 313.

  The power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, at the end of the game hall), the state before the power is turned off is stored, so that if you want to return to the initial state when turning on the power, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 Is input.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. The back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a resin-formed back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 are integrated.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and the front surface and the lower surface are opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display device unit 35. However, in the present embodiment, a part of the main controller 261 is also covered. The variable display device unit 35 is protected by a protective cover 354 from a game ball or the like falling from an upper tank 355 or the like which will be described later.

  In addition, a large number of ventilation holes 354 a are provided on the back surface of the protective cover portion 354. However, a vent hole 354a is not provided at a rear position of the terminal portion 702 or the like in order to suppress an illegal act on the cable connector C3 or the like connected to the terminal portion 702 or the like. In the closed state of the back pack 351 (back pack unit 203), the protective cover portion 354 is disposed so as to cover the side in which the connector such as the cable connector C3 connected to the terminal portion 702 etc. is pulled out. Become.

  The payout mechanism 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from island facilities of the game arcade are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. Further, a case rail 357 is formed vertically on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism unit 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board for taking in the main power to the power supply device 313 from the outside. 382 is installed. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board 262) of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  The RAM 503 has a configuration in which data can be retained (backed up) by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. In addition to the memory and area, a backup area 503a is provided.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is performed by an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) (the NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 when the power is turned off to the backup area 503a of the RAM 503). Stored) is executed when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, etc., and the recovery of each value written in the backup area 503a is a power recovery process when the power is turned on (including power on when the power failure is resolved, and so on). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 505 and a power supply port 507 are connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, a power supply line, and the like. Of course, the power supply line may be arranged independently from the bus line 504 (the same applies to the circuit configurations of other substrates). The input / output port 505 includes the terminal portions 701 to 704 and the terminal portion 706, and the power supply port 507 includes the terminal portion 705.

  The input / output port 505 is connected to a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312 and a sub relay board 570, which will be described later. In addition, although not shown for convenience, various electrical components such as various detection switches such as the first trigger corresponding port switch 224 and various boards such as the first panel relay board are connected. The power supply to the launch control device 312 and the like is also performed via the main control device 261.

  Further, as described above, the sub relay board 570 is connected to the input / output port 505 of the main control device 261, the input / output port 554 of the sub control device 560, the power supply port 556, and the power supply port 533 of the display control device 45. It is connected to the. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 560 is configured by the connector 578. The sub relay board 570 is also electrically connected to the normal symbol display device 41 and the special display device 43.

  The sub-control device 560 (sub-control board 561) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and various control programs that are stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553 that is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input / output port 554, a bus line (including a power supply line) 555, a power supply port 556, and other interrupt circuits and timer circuits (not shown), data transmission / reception Various circuits such as a circuit are provided. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs. For example, the RAM 553 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counter values to be described later.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 and the power supply port 556 via a bus line 555. Further, the display control device 45, the effect button 125, the speaker SP, the frame lamp group LG1, the panel lamp group LG2, and the like are connected to the input / output port 554. The power supply to the speaker SP, the frame lamp group LG1, the panel lamp group LG2, and the like is also performed via the sub-control device 560.

  The CPU 551 of the sub control device 560 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 via the sub relay board 570, for example, and the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. Further, the sub-control device 560 controls the speaker SP, the frame lamp group LG1, the panel lamp group LG2, and the like, and controls voice and lamp display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not it is a big hit, and the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the sub control device 560. Then, display according to the display of the special display device 43 is performed.

  Further, the sub control device 560 is provided with a volume power saving changeover switch SW for switching the volume level output from the speaker SP and the degree of the power saving state described later (see FIG. 6 and the like). The volume power saving changeover switch SW constitutes a switching operation means in the present embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of the volume power saving changeover switch SW will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b). FIG. 11A is a schematic plan view of the volume power saving switching switch SW, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing the relationship between the scale value of the volume power saving switching switch SW, the volume level, and the power saving level. .

  The volume level is a level representing the volume output from the speaker SP, and in this embodiment, the volume level is switched to four levels from the minimum “0” to the maximum “4”. Here, the volume level “0” means “silent (silenced) state”.

  On the other hand, the power saving level is a level representing the degree of power saving, such as turning off the frame lamp group LG1, etc., and in this embodiment, it is switched to four levels from the minimum “0” to the maximum “4”. Here, the power saving level “0” means “normal state” in which power is not saved. The power saving level “1” indicates a state in which only the “display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42” is saved, and the power saving level “2” indicates “the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42” + “panel lamp group LG2”. The power saving state indicates a power saving level “3”, which indicates a state in which “display part 42a of decorative design display device 42” + “panel lamp group LG2” + “frame lamp group LG1” is saved.

  The volume power saving changeover switch SW is configured to be switchable to 16 points so that the sound volume level 4 steps and the power saving level 4 steps can be respectively designated. For example, when a point with the scale “01” is designated, the volume level “0” and the power saving level “1” are set, and when the point with the scale “23” is designated, the volume is set. Level “2” and power saving level “3” are set.

  Further, the sub-control device 560 periodically reads the point designated by the volume power saving changeover switch SW, and the value of the volume level corresponding to this point and the value of the power saving level are respectively stored in predetermined areas (volume level value rating area, It is stored in the power saving level value storage area.

  Further, the payout control device 311 (the payout control board 311a) performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout motor 358a. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is configured to hold (backup) data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above. The RAM 513 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power off, each register, so that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the NMI interrupt processing, and conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the power recovery processing when the power is turned on.

  In the work area of the RAM 513, a payout permission flag in which the payout permission of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag that is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control A command buffer in which commands transmitted from the device 261 are stored is provided.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 having been restored to power. There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when it is returned to the front, and it is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process (see FIG. 29) described later.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  An input / output port 515 and a power supply port 517 are connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus, a data bus, a power supply line, and the like. The input / output port 515 is configured by the terminal portion 592, and the power supply port 517 is configured by the terminal portion 593.

  A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a payout motor 358a, etc. are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively. The power supply to the payout motor 358a and the like is also performed via the payout control device 311.

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 560. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, a bus line (power supply line). 530, 531 and a power supply port 533. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 560 is connected to the input port 527.

  A CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 and the power supply port 533 through a bus line 530. The input port 527 is configured by the terminal portion 658, and the power supply port 533 is configured by the terminal portion 659.

  An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529. The power supply to the decorative symbol display device 42 is also performed via the display control device 45.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command (command signal) transmitted from the sub-control device 560 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. Control of the VDP 526 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The power supply device 313 (power supply board 313a) is connected to a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and the RAM erase switch 323. A RAM erase switch circuit 543.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power (drive power) to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through an electrical path such as the cable connector C1. As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like.

  As described above, the power supply unit 541 is connected to the power supply port 507 of the main control device 261 and the power supply port 517 of the payout control device 311, and is connected to the power supply port 556 of the sub control device 560 via the sub relay board 570. The display control device 45 is connected to a power supply port 533.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 70, and the launch device 70 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. The launch control device 312 is connected to the main control device 261 via the cable connector C5.

  The firing control device 312 is electrically connected to the variable resistor 445, the touch sensor 451, and the stop switch 455 described above. A signal related to a resistance value is output from the variable resistor 445, and a game is output from the touch sensor 451. A signal regarding whether or not a person is touching the handle 18 and a signal regarding whether or not a predetermined stop lever is being pressed are input from the stop switch 455 to the launch control device 312.

  Further, the signal from the touch sensor 451 is also input to the main control device 261 via the firing control device 312. The main control device 261 outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control device 312 on the condition that a signal indicating that the player is touching the handle 18 is input from the touch sensor 451, and the sub control device. A power saving cancellation signal is output to 560.

  The touch sensor 451 may be directly electrically connected to the main control device 261 without passing through the firing control device 312, and a signal from the touch sensor 451 may be directly input to the main control device 261.

  The power saving cancellation signal is a signal for preventing the sub control device 560 from permitting the power saving setting. That is, while the power saving cancellation signal is output from the main control device 261, the power saving setting by the sub control device 560 is prohibited.

  On the other hand, the launch control device 312 outputs that a launch permission signal is output from the main control device 261, a signal indicating that the player is touching the handle 18 is output from the touch sensor 451, and the stop lever is pressed. On condition that a signal indicating that the operation is being performed is not output from the stop switch 455, the launching device 70 is driven, and the game balls are launched one by one with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. At the time of launching, the power supplied to the launching device 70 is adjusted by the launch control device 312 based on a signal related to the resistance value input from the variable resistor 445, and as a result, the launching speed of the game ball is adjusted. It has become.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 performs lottery (big hit lottery) using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the jackpot random number counter V1 as a lottery random number counter used for the jackpot lottery and the mode determination used for determining the transition to the high probability mode or the low probability mode described later when the jackpot is won. The counter V2, the variation selection counter V3 used for determining the variation display time of the special display device 43, the initial value random number counter VINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter V1, and the variation display time of the special display device 43 The variation type counters VS1 and VS2 used for determining the normal symbol and the normal symbol random number counter V4 used for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 41 are used. Note that the variation selection counter V3 is also used for a variation pattern or reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display device 43 is determined according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the effect pattern (effect mode) are determined.

  Each of the counters V1, V2, V3, VINI, VS1, VS2, and V4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 that is the lower limit value after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter VINI).

  The RAM 503 is provided with a first reserved ball storage area and a second reserved ball storage area as a storage area composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). In each area of the first reserved ball storage area, the values of the jackpot random number counter V1, the mode determination counter V2, and the variation selection counter V3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the first opportunity corresponding port 33. It is designed to be stored. Further, in each area of the second reserved ball storage area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the second opportunity corresponding port 34. Yes.

  In detail, each jackpot random number counter V1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 676, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (ie, 676) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the jackpot random number counter V1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter VINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter V1. The initial value random number counter VINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter V1 (value = 0 to 676), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter V1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter V1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, the value of the jackpot random number counter V1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding port 33. There are two types of jackpot random numbers, a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode, etc.) and a high probability state (high probability mode). The number of random number values to be 2 is “337, 673”, the number of random number values that are jackpots in the high probability state is 10, and the value is “67, 131, 199, 269,337,401,463,523,601,661 ".

  Here, various game modes will be described. In the present embodiment, the game mode (game state) is switched between a normal mode (normal state) and a plurality of specific modes that are more advantageous to the player than the normal mode. More specifically, as the specific mode, two modes, a high probability mode and a time reduction mode, are set. Among these, the high probability mode is a game mode that continues until the next jackpot, and the time reduction mode is a mode that shifts to the next mode after the predetermined period.

  The normal mode refers to a normal state that is not a specific mode such as the high probability mode. Therefore, in the normal mode, the jackpot probability (winning probability of the jackpot state) is a normal low probability.

  In addition, the high probability mode is a big hit when the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed with “red” (the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with a predetermined probability variation symbol), and the subsequent big hit A state in which the probability is higher than that in the low probability state. In the following description, the case where the decorative symbol display device 42 is a jackpot due to the probability variation symbol is referred to as “probability variation jackpot”, and the case where the jackpot is due to a normal symbol other than the probability variation symbol is referred to as “normal jackpot”.

  In the high probability mode, the jackpot probability is increased and a high probability state is obtained. In addition, in this embodiment, (1) a state in which the variable display time in the special display device 43 is shortened (time shortening state). (2) A state in which the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened, (3) a state in which a specified time (opening time) related to the opening / closing process of the first trigger corresponding port 33 is made longer than in the normal mode, or A state in which the prescribed number (winning number) is increased compared to the normal mode, and (4) when a winning result indicating that the “○” symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 is obtained. A state in which the number of executions of the opening / closing process of the corresponding port 33 is increased as compared with the normal mode. (5) The probability that the “○” symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (winning probability) in the normal mode is selected. Higher state is given. More specifically, in the high probability mode, the opening / closing member of the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is in an open state, and when a specified time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed or a specified number (for example, 3) of game balls have entered. It will be closed when there is. This opening / closing process is repeated twice. As a result, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is opened frequently, and the big hit lottery is continuously made, and the ball is well held. In addition to this, as a high probability mode, in addition to increasing the jackpot probability (winning probability of the jackpot state), any combination of the above configurations (1) to (5) (for example, (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (1) and (2), (1) and (3), (1) and (4), (1) and (5), (2) and (3 ), (2) and (4), (2) and (5), (3) and (4), (3) and (5), (4) and (5), (1) and (2) (3), (1) and (2) and (4), (1) and (2) and (5), (1) and (3) and (4), (1) and (3) and (5 ), (1) and (4) and (5), (2) and (3) and (4), (2) and (3) and (5), (2) and (4) and (5), (3), (4) and (5), (1), (2), (3) and (4), (1), (2), (3) and (5), (1) and (2 ) And (4) (5) can be employed (1) and (3) and (4) (5), and (2) and (3) and (4) (5)). In addition, the ratio of the open state with respect to the closed state per unit time in the 1st opportunity corresponding port 33 will be in a state higher than the ratio at the time of a normal mode by the state of said (2)-(5). That is, such a state corresponds to the high ball entering state in the present embodiment. Therefore, the high probability mode can be paraphrased as a high probability, a time reduction, and a high pitching mode. On the other hand, a state that is not in the states (2) to (5) as in the normal mode corresponds to a low entry state.

  In addition, the time reduction mode is a big hit when the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed in “green” (the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with a normal symbol other than a predetermined probability variation symbol). Thereafter, the game mode is set while the variable display of the special display device 43 is performed 100 times, which means a state more advantageous to the player than the normal mode. The time reduction mode is a gaming mode in which the jackpot probability is as low as that in the normal mode, and the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is higher than the ratio in the normal mode. . In the present embodiment, the states (1) to (5) given in the high probability mode are given in the same manner. That is, except for the difference in jackpot probability (winning probability in the jackpot state), the same state (time shortening state and high pitching state) is obtained. Of course, as in the high probability mode, any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) can be adopted. Therefore, the time shortening mode can be restated as a low probability / time shortening / high pitching mode.

  For example, the mode determination counter V2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9), the mode determination counter V2 returns to the lower limit value of 0. In this embodiment, the mode determination counter V2 determines whether or not to shift to the high probability mode after the big hit. Specifically, if the counter value is an odd number such as “1, 3, 5, 7, 9”, the transition to the high probability mode is determined, and if the counter value is an even number such as “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”. In this case, the transition to the time reduction mode is determined. Although the term “transition” is used here, the high probability mode is continued if the counter value is odd when originally in the high probability mode, and the counter value is even when originally in the time reduction mode. If so, the time shortening mode is continued. The mode decision counter V2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the mode decision counter V2 is stored in the mode decision counter buffer. The value of the mode determination counter V2 stored in the mode determination counter buffer is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding port 33.

  In addition, the variation selection counter V3 is configured such that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to 0, which is a lower limit value. In this embodiment, after the reach is generated with respect to the decorative symbol by the variation selection counter V3, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol, and the “stop off-front reach” is stopped. “Reach other than front / rear detachment” where the symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol and “completely disengagement” where the reach does not occur are selected by lottery. For example, V3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front / rear outreach and V3 = 2 to 21 correspond to reach other than front / rear disengagement, and V3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to complete disengagement. The reach lottery may be individually set according to the state of the lottery probability, the number of starting reserved balls at the start of change, and the like. The fluctuation selection counter V3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter V3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding port 33, the value of the variation selection counter V3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503.

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters VS1 and VS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 198), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter VS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 240) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. In the following description, VS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and VS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”. This is shown in FIG. The first variation type counter VS1 determines the reach type (reach pattern) of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter VS2 determines the final after the occurrence of reach. A more detailed symbol variation mode such as an elapsed time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops is determined. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters VS1 and VS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter VS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter VS1 and the stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when “big hit” occurs, one of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected, and when “out-of-front reach” occurs, normal reach and super reach are selected. When either one is selected and “reach other than front / rear out” occurs, normal reach is selected. In addition, in the case of “completely off”, none of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected.

  The variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are updated once every time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of VS1 and VS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the big hit random number counter V1, the variation selection counter V3, and the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter V4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 250) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The normal symbol random number counter V4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right second trigger corresponding port 34. Is done. Normally, there are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is “5 to 153”. On the other hand, in the high probability mode and the time reduction mode, that is, in the case where the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is in the high pitching state, there are 224, and the range is “5-228”. That is, the probability of stopping the symbol “◯” in the normal symbol display device 41 is higher than that in the normal mode. When the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter V4 is acquired, the symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed after the normal symbol display device 41 performs the variable display for a predetermined time. Then, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is activated for a predetermined time. Further, in the high probability mode and the time reduction mode, the time until the lottery result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (variable display time of the normal symbol) is shortened. The ratio at which the mouth 33 is in a high entrance state increases. As a result, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is frequently opened, and the big hit lottery is continuously performed.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example.

  In FIG. 15, first, in step S301, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter VINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter V1, the mode determination counter V2, the variation selection counter V3, and the normal symbol random number counter V4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, 676, 9 respectively. , 238, 250) is cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters V1, V2, V3, V4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning in the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is executed, and in step S305, a second opportunity corresponding port passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the second opportunity corresponding port 34 is performed. Run. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S <b> 501, whether or not the game ball has won the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is determined based on the detection information of the first opportunity corresponding port switch 224. If it is determined that the game ball has won the first opportunity corresponding port 33, in the subsequent step S502, it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). The process proceeds to step S503 on the condition that there is a winning at the first opportunity corresponding port 33 and the number N of starting reserved balls is smaller than 4, and the number N of starting reserved balls is incremented.

  In subsequent step S504, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the values of the jackpot random number counter V1, the mode determination counter V2, and the variation selection counter V3 updated by the random number update process in step S303 are used as the first free storage area in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. Store in the area. Thereafter, the start winning process is temporarily terminated.

  Next, the second opportunity corresponding port passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the second opportunity corresponding port 34 is determined based on the detection information of the second opportunity corresponding port switch 225. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second opportunity corresponding port 34, in the subsequent step S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of retained balls of the normal symbol display device 41 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine. The process proceeds to step S603 on the condition that there is a passage to the second opportunity corresponding port 34 and the number of reserved balls N <4, and the number of reserved balls N is incremented by one. In subsequent step S604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the second opportunity corresponding port passing process is temporarily ended.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 16 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (the sub-control device 560, the payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S103, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S113 to clear (erase) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S105 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored. In this case as well, the process proceeds to step S113. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S106, and in the subsequent step S107, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process also proceeds to step S113 in this case.

  In the process of step S113, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 560, the payout control device 311 and the like, which are control devices on the sub side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S114, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S114, etc.). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S114 or the like). That is, in step S114, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S115, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S112, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S104: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S108, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S109, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared. In step S110, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted, and in step S111, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S112, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display device 43 and the first opportunity corresponding port 33 updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, or the like is transmitted to the sub-control device 560. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are commands (command information) output to the sub-control device 560 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect in accordance with the display performed on the special display device 43. is there. On the other hand, the sub control device 560 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 so as to display (variable display).

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode, any one of “FF10”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, and “FF16” is set as the variation pattern command. In the high probability mode, “FD10”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, “FD16” are set, and in the time reduction mode, “FE10”, “FE11”. , “FE12”, “FE13”, “FE14”, “FE15”, “FE16” are set. On the other hand, the sub-control device 560 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and decoration symbol variation types in a table (see FIG. 33). Then, the sub control device 560 executes an effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  Normal reach is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. In the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach, “FF11” is set in the normal mode, “FD11” is set in the high probability mode, and “FE11” is set in the time reduction mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time for which the normal reach is derived is set to “20 seconds” in the normal mode, “8 seconds” in the high probability mode, and “10 seconds” in the time reduction mode.

  Super Reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. is there. In this embodiment, three types (super reach SR1, SR2, SR3) of 30 second, 40 second, and 50 second patterns are prepared for the super reach in the normal mode. Note that the variable display time in the high probability mode and in the time reduction mode is shortened compared to that in the normal mode, as in the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the case of the super reach SR1, “FF12” in the normal mode, “FD12” in the high probability mode, and “FE12” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern commands. In the case of the super reach SR2, “FF13” in the normal mode, “FD13” in the high probability mode, and “FE13” in the time reduction mode are set. In the case of the super reach SR3, “FF14” in the normal mode, “FD14” in the high probability mode, and “FE14” in the time reduction mode are set.

  Premium reach is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character with a different pattern from the super reach is displayed. This is a reach pattern that makes the player have a sense of expectation. In the premium reach of this embodiment, two types (premium reach PR1, PR2) of 60-second and 70-second patterns are prepared in the normal mode. Note that the variable display time in the high probability mode and in the time reduction mode is shortened compared to that in the normal mode, as in the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the premium reach PR1, “FF15” in the normal mode, “FD15” in the high probability mode, and “FE15” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern command. In the premium reach PR2, “FF16” in the normal mode, “FD16” in the high probability mode, and “FE16” in the time reduction mode are set.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to “complete out” that does not reach any reach state is set to “FF10” in the normal mode, “FD10” in the high probability mode, and “FE10” in the time reduction mode. The In the present embodiment, the variable display time that is completely off is set to 10 seconds in the normal mode. Of course, the variable display time in the high probability mode and the time shortening mode is shortened compared to the normal mode as in the normal reach.

  Further, the sub-control device 560 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 560 to determine a stop symbol. A combination of probability variation symbols, a normal symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a completely out symbol design combination. Five classifications are designated, which are the combinations. These divisions are indicated by “A1”, “A2”, “A3”, “A4”, “A5”, and any of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 560 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 560 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the stop symbol classification and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described.

  The combination of probability variation symbols is a combination of symbols composed of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 and “A1” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of probability variation symbols. Then, when “A1” indicating the probability variation symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 560 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 that are all flat. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of normal symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6 and 8, and “A2” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of normal symbols. Then, when “A2” indicating the normal symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 560 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of back and forth symbols corresponds to the combination of back and forth symbols, where after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by one shift before and after the reach symbol. “A3” is set in the symbol command. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to the “reach other than front / rear detachment” that occurs after reach occurs, and the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol. “A4” is set in the command. The combination of complete detachment symbols corresponds to “complete detachment” in which no reach occurs, and “A5” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of complete detachment symbols. As will be described later in detail, when “A3” to “A5” are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 560 stops the symbol combination stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. In the present embodiment, three commands “A3” to “A5” are prepared for the symbol command for detachment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration having only one symbol command for detachment may be used.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 14, in step S202, update of the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 is executed. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters VS 1 and VS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In subsequent step S203, various payout information received from the payout control device 311 (for example, a prize ball counting signal or a payout abnormality signal) is read.

  In step S204, on the condition that a signal indicating that the player is touching the handle 18 is input from the touch sensor 451, a setting is made to output a firing permission signal to the firing control device 312 and the sub-control is performed. The apparatus 560 is set to output a power saving cancellation signal.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the special display device 43 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the special display device 43, and the jackpot determination and the decorative pattern variation pattern (effect pattern) in the decorative design display device 42 are performed. Settings are made. Details of the first display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, variable winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what control is performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when the big win state (special game state) is reached, the opening / closing process of the big winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are set as to what kind of control is performed in the normal symbol display device 41. Details of the second display control process will be described later.

  In step S208, an opportunity corresponding opening / closing control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the opening / closing member is set as to what kind of control is performed on the opening / closing member of the first opportunity corresponding port 33.

  After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal processing (this embodiment) It is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter VINI and the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S211, step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter VINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter VINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment).

  In step S212, the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the change values of the variation type counters VS 1 and VS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter VINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter V1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter VINI using the remaining time, and to change similarly. The type counters VS1 and VS2 can also be updated at random.

  Now, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step S213 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. To remember. Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The process of step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Further, since the interruption processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the first display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 19, in step S801, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made. The jackpot includes a jackpot state (special game state) and a predetermined time after the jackpot state ends.

  In the subsequent step S802, it is determined whether or not color change display (variation display) is being performed by the special display device 43 by looking at the setting status of the display timer. Specifically, when the display timer is set (when it is in the on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and when the display timer is released (when it is in the off state), the variable display is in a stopped state. It is considered that the stop display is in progress. If it is not a big hit and is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S803, where it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is greater than zero. At this time, if it is a big hit or if the number N of starting reserved balls is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  Further, if neither the big hit or the variable display is being displayed and if the number of starting reserved balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, 1 is subtracted from the number N of starting reserved balls. In step S805, processing for shifting the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas on hold in the first holding ball storage area to the execution area side. Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  Thereafter, in step S806, a variable display setting process is executed. Here, the details of the variable display setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the big hit random number counter V1 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter V1 and the mode at that time, and as described above, in the low probability state such as the normal mode, the numerical value 0 to 676 of the jackpot random number counter V1. Among them, “337, 673” is a winning value, and in the high probability mode, “67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661” is a winning value. If it is determined that the game is a big hit (step S901: YES), the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S901: NO), that is, when it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S909.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot. In the present embodiment, the system is configured to shift to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode with a probability of 1/2 in the case of a big hit. Specifically, whether or not to shift to the high probability mode is determined based on the value of the mode determination counter V2 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. If the value of the stored mode determination counter V2 is an odd number “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” among the numerical values 0 to 9, the transition to the high probability mode is determined (probability large hit), and the even number “ If it is 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 ", the transition to the time reduction mode is determined (usually a big hit).

  Here, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot (step S902: YES), the jackpot variation pattern is determined in step S904, and the probability variation symbol (“A1” in the present embodiment) is set to the symbol command in step S905. Then, the process proceeds to step S917.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S902 that it is not a probable big hit (step S902: NO), that is, if it is a normal big hit, a big hit variation pattern is determined in step S907, and a normal symbol (this embodiment) is determined in step S908. Then, “A2”) is set as the symbol command, and the process proceeds to step S917.

  In steps S904 and S907, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined, and the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern command. At this time, the values of the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are confirmed, and the symbol variation mode of the decorative symbol is determined based on the values of the first and second variation type counters VS1 and VS2. . The relationship between the value of the first variation type counter VS1 and the reach pattern (variation type) and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter VS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like for each game mode. . Note that the mode determination in the present embodiment is performed by a combination of on / off states of a high probability state flag, a time shortening state flag, and a high entry state flag, which will be described later. For example, if the high probability state flag, the time shortening state flag, and the high pitched state flag are all on (flag value “1”), it is determined that the mode is a high probability mode.

  Here, the correspondence between the numerical values of the first variation type counter VS1 and the second variation type counter VS2 and the variation type will be described. For example, at the big hit time in the normal mode, the correspondence is defined by a normal mode big hit table as shown in FIG. That is, when VS1 = 0 to 9, “FF11” (normal reach) is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the value of VS2. When VS1 = 10 to 196 and VS2 = 0 to 69, “FF12” (super reach SR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 10 to 196 and VS2 = 70 to 149, “FF13” (super reach SR2) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 10 to 196 and VS2 = 150 to 240, “FF14” (super reach SR3) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 197, 198 and VS2 = 0-120, “FF15” (premium reach PR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 197, 198 and VS2 = 121-240, “FF16” (premium reach PR2) is set in the variation pattern command.

  The symbol commands in step S905 and step S908 indicate the jackpot symbol in a predetermined section, and the sub controller 560 determines the stop symbol as described later. Specifically, when “A1” indicating the combination of probability variation symbols is set in the symbol command (step S905), the symbol combination of any one of the first, third, fifth, seventh, and ninth slots is sub-selected. Control device 560 determines the stop symbol. On the other hand, when “A2” indicating the combination of normal symbols is set in the symbol command (step S908), any combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is changed to the sub-control device 560. Is determined as a stop symbol. After the symbol command is set in step S905 and step S908, the process proceeds to step S917.

  In step S909, which is shifted when a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a reach is reached. This determination is made based on the value of the variation selection counter V3 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation selection counter V3 causes the final stop symbol after the occurrence of reach to stop by shifting by one by one before and after the reach symbol, and the final stop after the occurrence of reach. The symbol “Leach other than front / rear detachment” that stops when it is not before or after the reach symbol, and “Complete detachment” that does not generate reach are selected by lottery. 2 to 21 correspond to reach other than front / rear disengagement, and V3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to complete disengagement. Here, when it is determined that it is reach (step S909: YES), the process proceeds to step S910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not reach (step S909: NO), that is, if it is “completely out”, a dislocation variation pattern is determined in step S915, and a complete out symbol is set as a symbol command in step S916. Then, the process proceeds to step S917.

  In step S910, it is determined whether or not the front / rear reach is reached. If it is determined that the front / rear reach is out of step (step S910: YES), a deviation variation pattern is determined in step S911, the front / rear pattern is set as a symbol command in step S912, and the process proceeds to step S917. . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not front / rear detachment (step S910: NO), that is, when it is reach other than front / rear detachment, a detachment variation pattern is determined in step S913, and symbols other than front / rear detachment are determined in step S914. The command is set, and the process proceeds to step S917.

  When the outlier variation pattern is determined in steps S911, S913, and S915, the variation pattern is determined based on the values of the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. And so on.

  Here, the correspondence between the numerical value of the first variation type counter VS1 and the variation type will be described. For example, at the time of front / rear detachment during the normal mode, the correspondence is defined by a front / rear detachment table during the normal mode as shown in FIG. That is, when VS1 = 0 to 9, “FF11” (normal reach) is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the value of VS2. When VS1 = 10 to 198 and VS2 = 0 to 90, “FF12” (super reach SR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 10 to 198 and VS2 = 91 to 170, “FF13” (super reach SR2) is set in the variation pattern command. When VS1 = 10 to 198 and VS2 = 171 to 240, “FF14” (super reach SR3) is set in the variation pattern command. At the time of reach other than forward / backward deviation (V3 = 2 to 21), normal reach is performed regardless of the values of the variation type counters VS1 and VS2, and “FF11” is set in the variation pattern command. Further, at the time of complete deviation (V3 = 22 to 238), “FF10” is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the values of the variation type counters VS1 and VS2.

  Further, the symbol command in step S912, step S914, and step S916 indicates a predetermined division of the combination of symbols that are out of the same manner as in step S905 and the like. Specifically, when “A3” indicating the combination of the front and rear symbols is set in the symbol command (step S912), the sub-control device 560 that has received the symbol command stores it in the front and rear error symbol buffer of the RAM 553. The combination of symbols corresponding to the front / rear out of reach is determined as the stop symbol. When “A4” indicating a combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment is set in the symbol command (step S914), a combination of symbols corresponding to reach other than front / rear detachment stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear detachment of RAM 553 is selected. The sub control device 560 determines the stop symbol. When the symbol command “A5” indicating the combination of complete losing symbols is set in the symbol command (step S916), the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete detachment stored in the complete losing symbol buffer of the RAM 553 is sub-control unit 560. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  In step S917, start setting processing is performed to indicate that a condition for performing color change display (variation display) is satisfied in the special display device 43. In this start setting process, a display timer setting process is performed. The display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. For example, when the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), it is set to 10000 msec. As will be described later, the display timer is decremented by 4 msec every time the normal process is performed once. In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design selected by the variation type counters VS1 and VS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display device 43 in the present embodiment. Based on such setting of the display timer, when a control signal for starting color change display (variation display) is output to the special display device 43 in the next external output processing of normal processing, special display is performed. Color change display is started in the device 43. The special display device 43 is a three-color LED as described above, and changes color to green if the lit color is red, blue if it is green, and red if it is blue. Then, after step S917 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19, if step S802 is YES, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S807 to perform display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when a display timer of 10000 msec is set, the value of the display timer is 9996 msec in the display timer subtraction process in the next normal process for the time when the display timer is set.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S808, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S808. If an affirmative determination is made in step S808, the display timer is canceled [turned off (cleared)] in step S809, and stop display setting for performing a stop display on the special display device 43 is performed in step S810. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the next external output process in the normal process. In other words, if it is a promiscuous jackpot with a transition to the high probability mode, the red is stopped (for example, lighted only for a few seconds), and if it is a regular jackpot with a transition to the time reduction mode, the green is stopped and displayed. If it is off, blue is stopped and displayed. Again, the main display is such a stop display by the special display device 43, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary.

  In step S811, discrimination information setting processing is performed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, it is determined in step S1001 whether or not the stop display corresponds to a jackpot. Here, when it corresponds to jackpot, it transfers to step S1002 and performs jackpot setting. Specifically, processing for setting a jackpot flag, a variable flag, a variable timer, and a round number counter is performed. And after completion | finish of step S1002, a discrimination | determination information setting process is complete | finished.

  The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is a special gaming state, and here, “1” indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set as the flag value. The value of the jackpot flag is determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter V1.

  The variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in an open state.

  The variable timer is means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening.

  The round number counter is discriminating information for discriminating the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of special prize occurrences, that is, the number of executions of the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32), as will be described later. “15” indicating 15 rounds is set as a value.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the jackpot does not correspond, that is, it is determined that the game is out of place, the process proceeds to step S1003.

  In step S1003, it is determined whether or not a variation counter is set. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed). As will be described later, “100” is set as the counter value after the end of the normal jackpot.

  Here, when the variation counter is canceled (in the off state), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the variation counter is set (in the ON state), it is regarded that the time reduction state is being set, and in step S1004, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1005. To do.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is zero. That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the 100th variation display after the end of the normal jackpot (after the provision of the time reduction state). Here, if the remaining value of the variation counter is 0 count, a process of resetting a high pitching state flag described later in step S1006 is performed (set to “0”), and a time shortening state flag described later is set in step S1007. A process of resetting (setting “0”) is performed, a process of canceling (turning off) the variation counter is performed in step S1008, and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1005 that the value of the variation counter is not 0 count, the present process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, after the discrimination information setting process in step S <b> 811 is finished, the first display control process is finished. If the determination in step S808 is negative, in step S812, the color change display setting for continuously performing the color change display (fluctuation display) of the LED of the special display device 43 is performed, and this process is terminated. To do. Based on the setting contents of the color change display setting, a control signal for performing color change display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process in the next normal process. Specifically, it is set to change the color to green if the current lighting color is red, blue if it is green, and red if it is blue. Thereby, the color change display (variable display) of the LED of the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms. In the present embodiment, the determination information setting process (step S811) is performed after the stop display setting process (step S810). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display setting process (step S806). It is good also as a structure performed after.

  Next, the variable winning device control process in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the variable flag of the variable winning device 32 is on. Here, when it is determined that the variable flag is not ON (OFF), this processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, the variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, and when the variable flag is set in the determination processing of step S1201 ( When the variable flag is released (in the off state), it is regarded as being in the closed state.

  Based on the ON / OFF state of the variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the big prize opening is output to the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning device 32 is opened. On the other hand, when the variable flag is OFF, a control signal is output to the variable winning device 32 to close the big winning opening, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the variable flag is on, the variable winning device 32 is considered to be in the open state, and variable timer subtraction processing is performed in step S1202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the variable timer is decremented by 4 msec.

  In step S1203, the value of the variable timer after the subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the specified open time has elapsed. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the variable timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1203. If a positive determination is made in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 32 in step S1205 has reached a specified number. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step S1204. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 has not reached the prescribed number, this processing is terminated as it is. Therefore, the variable winning device 32 maintains the open state until the specified opening time elapses or until the specified number of game balls wins, and becomes the closed state when the condition is satisfied.

  Proceeding to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the number of times the variable winning device 32 has been released, that is, the number of executed rounds has reached a specified number (the value of the round number counter is 0), taking into account the value of the round number counter. . Here, if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number, in step S1206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter, and this process is terminated as it is. That is, the opening / closing process is repeated until the number of executed rounds reaches a predetermined number of times set in advance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1204 that the number of rounds has reached the specified number, an end setting process is performed in step S1207, and the process ends.

  In the end setting process of step S1207, the variable flag and variable timer reset process (cancellation process), the jackpot flag reset process, the round number counter reset process, the high probability state flag setting process, and the time reduction state flag setting process Then, a process for setting a high pitching state flag, a process for setting a variation counter, etc. are performed.

  More specifically, the variable flag and the variable timer are released (turned off) by the reset process of the variable flag and the variable timer.

  In the jackpot flag reset process, “0” indicating the end of the jackpot state is set as the flag value.

  The round number counter is canceled (off) by the reset processing of the round number counter.

  The high probability state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high probability state. In the high probability state flag setting process, the high probability state flag is stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. Based on the value of the current mode determination counter V2, the flag value is switched and set. As a result, when the high probability mode is set after the jackpot ends (probability jackpot), “1” indicating the occurrence of a high probability state is set as the flag value, and the time reduction mode is set (normal jackpot) “0” indicating the occurrence of a low probability state is set as the flag value.

  The time reduction state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a time reduction state. In the time reduction state flag setting process, “1” indicating that a time reduction state is generated is set. Set as a flag value.

  The high entry state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high entry state, and indicates that the high entry state is generated in the high entry state flag setting process. “1” is set as the flag value.

  The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed) as described above. In the variation counter setting process, the high probability state flag setting process and Similarly, switching setting of the variation number counter is performed based on the value of the mode determination counter V2. Thus, when the high probability mode is set after the jackpot is finished (probability jackpot), the variation counter is canceled (off). On the other hand, when the time reduction mode is set (usually a big hit), “100” corresponding to 100 fluctuation displays is set as the value of the fluctuation counter.

  Next, the second display control process of step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 24, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not switching display (variation display) by the normal symbol display device 41 is being performed by looking at the setting state of the display timer. Specifically, when the display timer is set (when it is in the on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and when the display timer is released (when it is in the off state), the variable display is in a stopped state. It is considered that the stop display is in progress. If it is not in the variable display, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether or not the number of reserved balls N is greater than zero. At this time, if the number of reserved balls N is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the variable display is not being performed and the number of held balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved balls N. In step S2104, a process for shifting the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  Thereafter, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that a condition for performing switching display (variable display) is established. Specifically, the display timer setting process of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. Note that the variable display time of the normal symbol display device 41 in the present embodiment is set in advance in each of the high and low entrance states as described above. Based on such setting of the display timer, when a control signal for starting switching display (variation display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing of the normal processing, the normal symbol is output. Switching display is started on the display device 41. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display “O” or “X” as an ordinary symbol. If the displayed symbol is “O”, “X”, “X” "Is switched to" ○ ". Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

  If step S2101 is YES, that is, if variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S2106 to perform display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is subtracted by 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2107. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the display timer is released [turned off (cleared)] in step S2108, and stop display setting for performing stop display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process in the normal process. That is, in the case of winning, the “◯” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being off, the “x” symbol is stopped.

  As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is made based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 stored in the execution area of the second reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the winning is made is determined based on the relationship between the value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 and the mode at that time, and as described above, the numerical value of the normal symbol random number counter V4 in the low entry state such as the normal mode. Of the 0 to 250, “5-153” is the winning value, and “5 to 228” is the winning value in a high pitched state such as the high probability mode.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110 to perform discrimination information setting processing, and this processing is terminated. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for performing an opening / closing process of the first opportunity corresponding port 33 (opening / closing member) is performed. Specifically, a setting process of a variable flag, a variable timer, and an opening number counter is performed.

  The variable flag is discrimination information for discriminating whether or not the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is open.

  The variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time of the first opportunity corresponding port 33, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening.

  The opening number counter is determination information for determining the number of execution times of the opening / closing process of the first opportunity corresponding port 33.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111 a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, “×” is displayed, and if “×”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the opportunity corresponding port opening / closing control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the variable flag of the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is on. Here, when it is determined that the variable flag is not ON (OFF), this processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, the variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is in the open state, and the variable flag is set in the determination processing in step S2201. In the case (in the on state), it is regarded as being in the open state, and in the case where the variable flag is released (in the case of the off state), it is regarded as being in the closed state.

  Based on the ON / OFF state of the variable flag, various control signals are output to the opening / closing member (opening / closing member solenoid) of the first trigger corresponding port 33 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the variable flag is on, a control signal for opening the opening / closing member is output, and the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is opened. On the other hand, when the variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the opening / closing member is output, and the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is closed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the variable flag is on, the first trigger corresponding port 33 is considered to be open, and variable timer subtraction processing is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the variable timer is decremented by 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the variable timer after the subtraction. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the variable timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process advances to step S2204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won in the first opportunity corresponding port 33 in step S2205 has reached a prescribed number. If an affirmative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step S2204. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2205, that is, if the number of winnings in the first opportunity corresponding port 33 has not reached the specified number, this processing is terminated as it is. Accordingly, the first opportunity corresponding port 33 is kept open until a specified opening time elapses or until a specified number of game balls are won, and is closed when the above condition is satisfied.

  Proceeding to step S2204, it is determined whether or not the number of times of opening the first opportunity corresponding port 33 has reached a specified number by taking into account the value of the number of times of opening counter (the value of the number of opening counter is 0). If the number of times of opening has not reached the specified number of times, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of times of opening counter in step S2206, and this process is terminated. That is, the opening / closing process is repeatedly performed until a predetermined number of times set in advance is reached.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2204 that the number of times of opening has reached the specified number of times, an end setting process is performed in step S2207, and this process ends.

  In the end setting process in step S2207, the variable flag and variable timer reset process (release process), the release number counter reset process, and the like are performed.

  More specifically, the variable flag and the variable timer are released (turned off) by the reset process of the variable flag and the variable timer. Further, the release number counter is released (turned off) by the reset process of the release number counter.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 26, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control apparatus 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control apparatus 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and if it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full state is performed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower pan 15 is detected based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set, and when the lower pan full is not reached , Set the lower pan full release state. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or a tank ball absence release state (ball state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, for example, the presence / absence of a state to be notified, such as an error state, is determined.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to execute the ball removal process by driving the payout motor 358a on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In the subsequent step S3212, vibrator control (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, processing of the sub control device 560 will be described. When the sub-control device 560 receives various command signals such as a variation pattern command and a power saving release signal from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 560 controls the decorative symbol display device 42, the speaker SP, and the like based on the various command signals.

  Here, the normal processing of the sub-control device 560 will be described in more detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This normal process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  After step S3902 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (in this example, It is determined whether or not 1 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3912.

  In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 560 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the off-set symbols of the big symbol decoration symbol counter V5, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each off symbol counter VL, VM, VR is used. The off symbol counters VL, VM, VR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter V5 determines a symbol when the variation of the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped (a jackpot symbol) at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 determines whether the decorative symbol is variable. There are 5 patterns and 5 normal symbols. Accordingly, five (0 to 4) counter values are prepared as the big hit decoration symbol counter V5. In other words, the jackpot decorative symbol counter V5 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 4, and reaches 0 to the upper limit value (that is, 4). When the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “A1” indicating a combination of probability variation symbols, for example, based on a table (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols), the counter value is If it is 0, it is “1”. ) If it is 4, the combination of probability variation symbols is determined in such a manner as “9” (the flat eye). When the symbol command is “A2” indicating a combination of normal symbols, for example, if the counter value is 0, “0” (based on a table (not shown) that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) ( 1) “2” (for the doublet), 2 for “4” (for the doublet), 3 for “6” (for the doublet), 4 for “8” ”(The doublet) and the normal symbol combination is determined. The jackpot decorative symbol counter V5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 560 receives the symbol command as will be described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter V5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the symbol command. It may be.

  Upper, middle, and lower off symbol counters VL, VM, and VR determine each stop symbol (combination of off symbols) in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the big hit lottery is missed. Since each of the ten decorative symbols is displayed in each column, ten (0 to 9) counter values are prepared for each column. The stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the up / down symbol counter VL, the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle / off symbol counter VM, and the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower / off symbol counter VR. Is determined.

  In this embodiment, the value of each counter VL, VM, VR is updated at random by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each outlier symbol counter VL, VM, VR is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. The Each outlier symbol counter VL, VM, VR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these outlier symbol counters VL, VM, VR is the front / rear outreach symbol buffer of RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out, and It is stored in one of the completely off symbol buffers.

  Here, the updating process of each off symbol counter VL, VM, VR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 32, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the up / out symbol counter VL. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the center / out symbol counter VM. The upper, middle and lower outlier symbol counters VL, VM, VR are configured to be updated one by one in a single update process. Accordingly, if the down / out symbol counter VR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the up / down symbol counter VL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the up / down symbol counter VL (step S4001 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4003, and the up / out symbol counter VL is updated. If it is the time to update the middle / outgoing symbol counter VM (YES in step S4002), the process advances to step S4004 to update the middle / outlier symbol counter VM. Further, if it is time to update the down / out symbol counter VR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005, and the down / out symbol counter VR is updated. In updating the out-of-step symbol counters VL, VM, VR in steps S4003 to S4005, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous counter value, and 10 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters VL, VM, VR.

  According to the above update processing of VL, VM, VR, each of the up / down / outward symbol counters VL, VM, VR is updated one by one in one update processing, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is nothing. Thus, every time the update process is executed three times, the set symbol counters VL, VM, VR are updated for one set.

  After that, in step S4006, the combination of the updated symbol counters VL, VM, VR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas And the symbol in the middle symbol display area are different from each other), and in the case of a combination of reach symbols (S4006 is YES), in step S4007, it is a back-and-forth outreach. It is determined whether or not there is. If the out symbol counters VL, VM, VR are a combination of front / rear out of reach (front / back out symbol) (YES in S4007), the process proceeds to step S4008, and the combination of the out symbol counters VL, VM, VR at that time is changed to the RAM 553. Is stored in the front / rear reach reach symbol buffer. If the off symbol counters VL, VM, VR are a combination of reach other than front / rear off (design other than front / rear off) (NO in S4007), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the off symbol counters VL, VM, VR at that time The combination is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and rear deviation of the RAM 553.

  If the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the process proceeds to step S4010 to determine whether or not the combination of the symbol symbols VL, VM, and VR is a symbol combination. If it is a combination of symbols (completely deviated symbols) (YES in S4010), the process proceeds to step S4011, and the combination of deviated symbol counters VL, VM, VR at that time is stored in the completely deviated symbol buffer of the RAM 553. If NO in both steps S4006 and S4010, the symbols are aligned at the top, middle, and bottom, that is, a combination of jackpot symbols. In such a case, the out symbol counters VL, VM, and VR are used as buffers. This process is terminated without storing.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 30, display setting processing is performed in step S3907. In this processing, various arithmetic processing such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed based on information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. More specifically, the sub-control device 560 determines a display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on a table associating the decorative symbol variation type and the variation pattern command as shown in FIG. A value corresponding to the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation time timer.

  The display command described above is, for example, a command for designating a series of display effects from the start to the end of variable display, or a command for designating a display effect during a jackpot, based on information stored in the command buffer. Each time a necessary display command is generated. Usually, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 560 are roughly divided into a normal variable data group, a reach effect data group, and the like. Basically, each data constituting these data groups is the variable time timer. Are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time order, thereby providing display effects according to various variation patterns. For example, the normal fluctuation data group includes normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2,..., And normal fluctuation data m, and the reach effect data group includes reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2,. In the case of n, data output is sequentially performed in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 →... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, and subsequently reach effect data 1 → 2 → with the start of reach effect. ... → Data is sequentially output in the order of n.

  In the display setting process in step S3907, the stop symbol is also determined based on the symbol command. As described above, when “A1” is set in the symbol command, any combination of symbols 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 is determined as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when “A2” is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A3” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front / rear reach reach symbol buffer (see FIG. 31) of the RAM 553 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A4” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear deviation is determined as a stop symbol. When “A5” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely off symbol buffer is determined as a stop symbol.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 560, and starts variable display of symbols on the decorative symbol display device. Once the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 560 is used until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (until the variation time timer set in step S3907 becomes 0). And the display control device 45 cooperate with each other to continue the variable display of symbols.

  Here, an example of a normal display mode in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 will be described. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with three upper, middle and lower symbol display areas, and a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed for each symbol display area. The In the present embodiment, various symbols Z are displayed as decorative symbols with numbers “1” to “9”. The various symbols Z are scrolled and displayed from right to left with periodicity in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of symbol strings.

  In such a case, in the upper symbol row, various symbols Z are displayed in descending order (in the order in which the attached numbers decrease), and in the middle symbol row and the lower symbol row, the various symbols Z are also in ascending order (indicated numbers increase). Are displayed in order). Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area, and at the time of the stop, the symbol Z is, for example, a combination of jackpot symbols on a predetermined jackpot line (the same in this embodiment) The jackpot state is started when it is arranged with a combination of types of symbols). Note that immediately before the above-mentioned combination of jackpot symbols is displayed, a so-called reach state (reach state establishment state) is established. However, even if it reaches a reach state, it may not reach a big hit state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as five lines). Therefore, in the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows, when the same type of the various symbols Z is displayed in a fixed stop state along with any of the five lines, a big hit state occurs.

  In the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be in a power saving state in which light is reduced.

  As described above, normally, a bright and colorful image is displayed on the display unit 42a [see FIG. 34 (a)]. On the other hand, when the power saving state is entered, the luminance decreases, the display section 42a becomes dark and appears almost black, and the characters “power saving” are displayed at the center [FIG. 34 (b). reference〕. This display of “power saving” corresponds to the power saving notification display in the present embodiment.

  In the display setting process in step S3907, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a switching process for switching the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the power saving state is also performed.

  Here, the switching process according to the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S7001, the port corresponding to the power saving cancellation signal among the input / output ports 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the power saving cancellation signal is input from the main control device 261.

  Here, when the power saving release signal is input, it is considered that the player is playing the game by holding the handle 18 or has started the game, and the process proceeds to step S7006.

  On the other hand, when the power saving cancellation signal is not input, it is considered that the player is not playing a game, and the process proceeds to step S7002.

  In step S7002, it is determined whether or not the value of the predetermined measurement timer Ts is “1 minute” or more. The measurement timer Ts is for measuring the time that has passed without the new variable display effect or the like from the point in time when the variable display effect or the jackpot effect or the like is finished on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is. That is, in step S7002, it is determined whether or not “1 minute” or more has elapsed since the end of various display effects.

  If the determination is affirmative, the power saving level value stored in the power saving level value storage area of the RAM 553 is checked in step S7003, and the process proceeds to step S7004. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made, the present process is terminated as it is.

  In step S7004, it is determined whether the value of the power saving level checked in step S7003 is “1” or more.

  If the value of the power saving level is “1” or more, a power saving setting process is performed in step S7005, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the power saving level value is not “1” or more, that is, if the power saving level value is “0”, the process proceeds to step S7007.

  In the power saving setting process in step S7005, setting is made to put the decorative symbol display device 42 in a power saving state. Specifically, a display command for causing the display control device 45 to execute a process for setting the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to a power saving state (dimmed state) as shown in FIG. 34B is set. . At the same time, the power saving flag for determining that the power saving state is set is turned on. The display command set here is output to the display control device 45 in an external output process in step 3911 described later.

  In step S7006 which has shifted from step S7001, it is determined whether or not the display unit 42a is currently in a power saving state by looking at the on / off status of the power saving flag.

  If it is determined that power is being saved, a demo setting process is performed in step S7007, and the process ends. The series of processes constitutes the return means in this embodiment. On the other hand, if it is determined that power is not being saved, the process is terminated.

  In the demonstration setting process of step S7007, a display command for causing the display control apparatus 45 to execute a process for performing a demonstration display is set on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display apparatus 42. At the same time, the power saving flag is turned off. As described above, the display command set here is output to the display control device 45 in the external output process in step 3911.

  Also, in the display setting process of step S3907, the presence / absence of the operation of the effect button 125 is also confirmed. When the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, the display setting corresponding to this is also performed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 30, in the lamp setting process in step S3908, the lighting / flashing patterns of the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 are set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed in the decorative symbol display device 42 at the normal time. Various control settings for driving the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 are performed.

  In the lamp setting process in step S3908, similarly to the above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a switching process for switching the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 to the power saving state is also performed.

  Here, the switching process related to the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S7101, it is determined whether the power saving flag is on. If the power saving flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S7102, and if the power saving flag is not turned on, the power saving cancellation process is performed in step S7106, and then this process ends. By performing the power saving cancellation process, it is possible to perform normal control such as lighting / flashing control as described above with respect to the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2.

  In step S7102, as described above, it is determined whether or not the power saving level value stored in the power saving level value storage area of the RAM 553 is equal to or greater than “2”.

  If the value of the power saving level is “2” or more, a setting process for turning off the panel lamp group LG2 is performed in step S7103, and the process proceeds to step S7104. On the other hand, if the value of the power saving level is less than “2”, the present process is terminated as it is.

  In step S7104, it is determined whether or not the value of the power saving level is “3”. If the power saving level value is “3”, a setting process for turning off the frame lamp group LG1 is performed in step S7105, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the power saving level is less than “3”, the present process is terminated as it is.

  The function of executing the switching process related to the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the switching process related to the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 constitutes a power saving means in the present embodiment.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 30, in the sound setting processing in step S <b> 3909, various control settings for driving the speaker SP, such as setting of the output pattern of the speaker SP, etc. in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. I do. Here, the sound volume is set based on the value of the sound volume level stored in the power saving level value storage area of the RAM 553.

  In step 3911, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents in steps S3905 to 3910 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3911 performed every 1 msec is performed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3912, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3913, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3912 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3914. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  As described above in detail, in the present embodiment, the player does not operate the handle 18 (without playing a game), and various display effects are completed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. When “1 minute” or more has passed without the display effect being performed, the display unit 42a and the like of the decorative symbol display device 42 is in a power saving state. Thereby, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be saved.

  Moreover, since the volume power saving changeover switch SW is provided and the degree of power saving can be adjusted in multiple stages as necessary, it is possible to improve convenience for a game shop.

  Further, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the power saving state is configured to perform a power saving notification display of “power saving”. With this configuration, the player can grasp that the pachinko machine 10 has not failed.

  In addition, when the player touches the handle 18 in the power saving state, the power saving state is terminated, and a predetermined demonstration display is started on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. . During the power saving state, the player cannot grasp the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 42, but the player grasps the content of the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 only by touching the handle 18. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In the above embodiment, at least when the player does not operate the handle 18 and various display effects are finished on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, a new display effect is not performed. When one minute or more has elapsed, a predetermined condition is established in which the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 enters a power saving state.

  The predetermined condition for entering the power saving state is not limited to this, and may be other conditions. For example, an infrared sensor or the like that can detect that the player is seated and the like may be provided, and the predetermined condition for entering the power saving state may be that a predetermined time elapses after the player leaves the seat. Alternatively, the predetermined condition may be that a predetermined time elapses without a game ball entering the first opportunity corresponding port 33 (from the last entry to the first opportunity corresponding port 33). Of course, it is good also as a structure which combined several conditions like the said embodiment.

  (B) The “light emitting means” to be the power saving target is not limited to the display unit 42a, the frame lamp group LG1, and the panel lamp group LG2 of the decorative symbol display device 42 of the above embodiment, and light emitting means different from these. May be in a power saving state.

  For example, as the light emitting display means, a dot matrix, electroluminescence (EL), a rotating drum, and the like can be cited as an example in addition to the decorative symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device).

  Further, the type of light source (light emitting element) constituting the various light emitting means is not limited to the LED, and other types such as a light bulb and a fluorescent lamp may be employed.

  (C) In the power saving state of the above embodiment, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is dimmed and the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 are turned off. The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be turned off, and the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 may be dimmed.

  In addition, although it does not mention in particular in the said embodiment about the method of light reduction etc., various methods can be considered. For example, (1) changing the ratio of the lighting time and light-off time of a light emitting element such as an LED that blinks at high speed, (2) changing the current or voltage supplied to the light emitting element, (3) one light emitting means ( The number of light-emitting elements that are turned on simultaneously in an illumination device or the like) is changed.

  In addition, when dimming or the like in a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative design display device 42, for example, the display image is displayed with a higher luminance in addition to controlling the backlight by the above methods (1) to (3). A method of switching to a low image (black type or the like) can be considered.

  (D) In the above embodiment, the power saving state of the display unit 42a, the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 of the decorative symbol display device 42 is switched in three stages. It is good also as a structure which becomes a power-saving state collectively.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can switch the dimming degree of the display part 42a, the frame lamp group LG1, the panel surface lamp group LG2, etc. of the decorative design display apparatus 42 in steps.

  (E) In the above embodiment, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the power saving state is configured to perform the power saving notification display of “power saving”, but the content of the power saving notification display is different. It may be. Of course, the power saving notification display may be omitted.

  When the power saving notification is displayed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the power saving state, a predetermined image is displayed on the screen periodically or randomly in order to prevent the liquid crystal panel from being burned (screen saver). Is preferred). Here, when displaying a predetermined image at random, it is possible to use a random number generated by the sub-control device 560 or the like to determine a stop symbol or the like in order to simplify the processing. preferable.

  (F) In the above embodiment, when the player touches the handle 18 in the power saving state, the power saving state is terminated, and a predetermined demonstration display is started on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It has a configuration. For example, a configuration in which no demonstration display is performed may be employed. Further, when the player touches the handle 18 in the power saving state, the power saving state is terminated, and the symbol is stopped and displayed once on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 before the power saving state is entered. An image may be displayed, and then a demonstration display may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, a series of demonstration displays may be displayed from the beginning when the power saving state ends and the demonstration display is started on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is good also as displaying from the middle. Here, there are various configurations for displaying the demonstration display from the middle. For example, when a predetermined time elapses without performing a new display effect since the end of various display effects on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, whether or not it is in a power saving state. In addition to the display control process during power saving, the sub-control device 560 starts the display control process related to the demonstration display, and when it is not in the power saving state, this is output (displayed) on the display unit 42a. If it is in the middle, it may not be output (displayed) on the display unit 42a. When the power saving state is canceled in such a configuration, a demonstration display in which the control processing is already executed in the sub-control device 560 and the like is output (displayed) to the display unit 42a from the middle thereof. In addition, in a configuration in which a series of demonstration displays are executed by sequentially executing various programs in accordance with a predetermined time sequence, the elapsed time from the time when the previous display effect is finished is measured by a predetermined timer. The demonstration display may be executed from the portion corresponding to the timer value when the power saving state ends.

  (G) In the above-described embodiment, the sub-control device 560 is configured to control power saving. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, another control device such as the main control device 261 may control the power-saving.

  (H) In the above embodiment, when the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2 are in the power saving state, they are simply turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group in the power saving state. In LG2, it is good also as a structure which performs predetermined lighting control or blink control regularly or randomly.

  (I) It is good also as a structure provided with the shielding member which can shield the display part 42a of the decorative design display apparatus 42 in a power-saving state. Such a shielding member is preferably used not only for power saving but also for a predetermined effect. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs the effect by a shielding member instead of or in addition to the demonstration display when the power saving state is canceled.

  Hereinafter, a configuration including a shielding member that shields the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 will be described using the shutter accessory 900 illustrated in FIGS. 37 to 41 as an example.

  The shutter accessory 900 is provided at a position above the display unit 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The shutter accessory 900 includes a set of shutter pieces 901 as a shielding member set, a slide member 902 as a power transmission member for driving them, and a motor unit 903 as a power source.

  The motor unit 903 includes a step motor and a gear mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor to the slide member 902. In FIGS. 37 to 41, only the gear mechanism is shown for convenience. Also, in FIG. 37 and the like, a dotted pattern is added to the portion of the shutter piece set 901 for easy understanding of the operation of the shutter piece set 901.

  The shutter piece set 901 is composed of five shutter pieces as shielding members. More specifically, a first shutter piece 901a pivotally supported on a casing as a base frame (not shown), a second shutter piece 901b assembled so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the first shutter piece 901a, 3 shutter pieces 901c, a fourth shutter piece 901d, and a fifth shutter piece 901e. Each of the shutter pieces 901a to 901e is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape.

  The shutter piece set 901 is assembled so that the shutter pieces 901a to 901e are overlapped in the front-rear direction. In normal times, the second to fifth shutter pieces 901b to 901e are on the back side of the first shutter piece 901a. (See FIG. 37).

  In the first shutter piece 901a, a rotating shaft portion 905 that is pivotally supported with respect to the casing (the front side in the drawing) is formed in the vicinity of a predetermined corner portion so as to protrude forward.

  On the other hand, the second to fifth shutter pieces 901b to 901e are slidably provided. Each of the shutter pieces 901a to 901e is provided with an engaging means for engaging with the adjacent shutter pieces. By these engagements, relative displacement of a predetermined amount or more between both adjacent shutter pieces is restricted, and the other can be operated by following (moving) one movement.

  The first shutter piece 901a is formed with a first engagement shaft portion 907 that protrudes rearward. The first engagement shaft portion 907 is loosely fitted in a first cam groove 909 described later formed in the slide member 902.

  The fifth shutter piece 901e is formed with a second engagement shaft portion 908 protruding rearward. The second engagement shaft portion 908 is loosely fitted in a second cam groove 910 described later formed in the slide member 902.

  Next, the slide member 902 for driving the shutter piece set 901 will be described in detail. The slite member 902 is formed in an elongated shape, and drives the shutter piece set 901 by a sliding operation along the horizontal direction.

  A first cam groove 909 and a second cam groove 910 are provided on the surface portion of the slide member 902.

  One end of the first engagement shaft portion 907 of the first shutter piece 901a is inserted into the first cam groove 909. One end of the second engagement shaft portion 908 of the fifth shutter piece 901e is inserted into the second cam groove 910.

  The first link mechanism configured by the first cam groove 909 and the first engagement shaft portion 907 is to integrally rotate and displace the shutter piece set 901 (shutter pieces 901a to 901e) around the rotation shaft portion 905. Mechanism.

  On the other hand, the second link mechanism constituted by the second cam groove 910 and the second engagement shaft portion 908 is configured such that the fifth shutter piece 901e and thus the second to fourth shutter pieces 901b to 901d are relative to the first shutter piece 901a. It is a mechanism for sliding displacement.

  Similarly to the above-described embodiment, the first cam groove 909 has an action section (an action section at the time of set rotation displacement) that acts on the first engagement shaft portion 907 when the shutter piece set 901 is integrally rotated and displaced. The fifth shutter piece 901e has a non-interference section (non-interference section at the time of relative displacement) that does not interfere with the first engagement shaft portion 907 (the power of the slide member 902 is not transmitted) when the fifth shutter piece 901e is relatively displaced.

  The second cam groove 910 has an action section (action section at the time of relative displacement) that acts on the second engagement shaft portion 908 when the fifth shutter piece 901e is relatively slid and displaced, and the shutter piece set 901 is integrally rotated and displaced. A non-interference section (non-interference section at the time of set rotation displacement) that does not interfere with the second engagement shaft portion 908 (the power of the slide member 902 is not transmitted).

  A gear portion 913 is formed on the upper side portion of the slide member 902 and meshes with the gear mechanism of the motor unit 903.

  Next, the operation of the shutter piece set 901 will be described. Normally, the shutter piece set 901 is held above the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in a state where the first to fifth shutter pieces 901a to 901e are superimposed (see FIG. 37). This state corresponds to the normal state (reference state) of the shutter piece set 901, and the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is fully opened.

  From this state, when the slide member 902 is slid leftward by the motor unit 903, the first engagement shaft portion 907 of the first shutter piece 901a located near the upper side of the slide member 902 is moved to the first cam. While being pushed leftward by the action section of the groove 909, it gradually moves to the lower side of the slide member 902 (see FIG. 38). As a result, the shutter piece set 901 (shutter pieces 901a to 901e) is integrally rotated and displaced in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation shaft portion 905, and jumps out to the front of the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It will be.

  At this time, the second engagement shaft portion 908 of the fifth shutter piece 901e moves along the non-interference section of the second cam groove 910 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the shutter piece set 901.

  When the slide member 902 slides by a predetermined amount, the tip of the shutter piece set 901 is directed downward, and the shutter piece set 901 is in a substantially vertical state (see FIG. 39).

  In this state, the first engagement shaft portion 907 of the first shutter piece 901a moves to the non-interference section of the first cam groove 909, and the second engagement shaft portion 908 of the fifth shutter piece 901e The cam groove 910 moves to the operating section.

  From this point, when the slide member 902 continues to move leftward, the second engagement shaft portion 908 of the fifth shutter piece 901e is pushed leftward by the action section of the second cam groove 910. Then, the fifth shutter piece 901e is pulled out from the back side of the first shutter piece 901a while the first shutter piece 901a is held in the vertical state (see FIG. 40).

  When the slide member 902 continues to move in the left direction, the fourth shutter piece 901d is pulled out from the back side of the first shutter piece 901a so as to be pulled by the fifth shutter piece 901e, and is pulled by the fourth shutter piece 901d. In this way, the third shutter piece 901c is pulled out, and the second shutter piece 901b is pulled out so as to be pulled by the third shutter piece 901c (see FIG. 41). If it will be in this state, the display part 42a of the decoration symbol display apparatus 42 will be in a fully closed state.

  When the power saving state ends and the shutter piece set 901 returns to the original state, the procedure reverse to the above procedure is followed.

  (J) In the above embodiment, a rotary type switch is adopted as the volume power saving switching switch SW, but other types of switches such as a slide type may be adopted. Further, the position where the volume power saving changeover switch SW is provided is not limited to the sub-control device 560, and may be provided at another position. Further, the switching operation means capable of switching whether or not to enter the power saving state may be omitted, and the power saving state may be always established when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  (K) You may implement as a different type of pachinko machine from the above-mentioned embodiment. In addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as an arrangement ball machine, various game machines such as a sparrow ball, and a revolving game machine such as a slot machine.

  (L) In the above embodiment, when the player touches the handle 18 as the return operation means in the power saving state, that is, a signal indicating that the player has touched the handle 18 is input from the touch sensor 451 to the main controller 261. On the condition that the power saving cancellation signal is output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 560, the power saving state ends and the normal state is restored.

  The condition for returning from the power saving state to the normal state is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the operation of the handle 18, the power saving state may be terminated when the sub control device 560 detects that the effect button 125 has been operated. In addition, a dedicated operation unit, a sensor, or the like may be provided as a return operation unit for returning from the power saving state to the normal state, and the return process may be performed based on detection of the player by the operation unit, the sensor, or the like. In addition, it is configured to return when an instruction signal is input from the management device of the amusement store or when a predetermined time elapses from the point of entering the power saving state, regardless of the detection of the operation means or the sensor. Also good.

  (M) The display unit 42a, the frame lamp group LG1, and the panel lamp group LG2 of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be gradually restored from the power saving state. For example, the following structure is mentioned as an example. If the player touches the handle 18 when everything is in the power saving state, only the decorative symbol display device 42 is set to the normal state while maintaining the power saving state of the frame lamp group LG1 and the panel lamp group LG2. Return. Thereafter, when a signal indicating that the player has touched the handle 18 for a predetermined period is continuously input from the touch sensor 451 to the main controller 261, the panel lamp group LG2 is returned. On the other hand, if the signal has not been input to the main control device 261 for a predetermined period of time, the decorative symbol display device 42 is again set in the power saving state. Further, when a signal indicating that the player has touched the handle 18 for a predetermined period is continuously input from the touch sensor 451 to the main controller 261 from the state in which the panel lamp group LG2 is returned, The lamp group LG1 is returned, and when the signal is not continuously input to the main controller 261 for a predetermined period, the panel lamp group LG2 is again set in the power saving state.

  Hereinafter, the technical idea that is not described in the claims and that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described together with the effects thereof.

Means 1. A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
At least one light emitting means;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a power saving means for setting the light emitting means to a power saving state in which the light emitting means is dimmed or extinguished,
A gaming machine comprising switching operation means capable of switching at least whether or not to enter the power saving state.

  According to the means 1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, a situation where there is no player continues for a predetermined time, the predetermined light-emitting means is dimmed or turned off. Thereby, the power consumption of the gaming machine can be saved.

  On the other hand, there is a desire for an amusement shop that conducts business to attract more customers to gaming machines. In this regard, by providing the switching operation means, it is possible to switch whether or not to enter the power saving state as necessary, so that it is possible to improve convenience for the game shop.

  Note that “establishment of the predetermined condition” includes, for example, “a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time point”. Specifically, “a predetermined time has elapsed since the time when the variable display was stopped in the predetermined display means”, “a predetermined time from the time when the presence, operation or action of the player is no longer detected by the predetermined detection means” Elapse ".

  The “light emitting means” includes, for example, “a liquid crystal display having a liquid crystal panel and a backlight for illuminating it” as well as “an electric decoration device including a light emitting element such as an LED and a cover member such as a lens covering the light emitting element”. “Light-emitting display means” such as “apparatus” is also included.

  Further, “dimming” means a state in which “light irradiation amount per unit time”, “luminance”, “brightness”, and the like are reduced more than usual.

  Mean 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the power saving means and the switching operation means are configured to be capable of switching the power saving state in stages.

  According to the above means 2, since the degree of power saving can be adjusted as necessary, the convenience can be further improved.

  Here, “the power saving state can be switched in stages” means that, for example, the number of light-emitting means to be turned off among a plurality of light-emitting means can be switched in stages, and the dimming degree of the light-emitting means to be dimmed Switching is possible.

  Means 3. The gaming machine according to means 1 or 2, further comprising a liquid crystal display device having a display unit made of a liquid crystal panel as the light emitting means.

  In recent years, a liquid crystal display device is often employed as a display device such as a pachinko machine, and the liquid crystal screen tends to be enlarged, so that the effect is extremely great just by saving the display device.

  Means 4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein a power saving notification display for notifying that the power saving state is in effect is performed on a display unit of the liquid crystal display device in the power saving state.

  If the display unit of the liquid crystal display device is in a light-saving state such as dimming, some players may misunderstand that it is out of order and some players may not play games on the gaming machine. is there. In this regard, the gaming machine breaks down by performing a power saving notification display for notifying that the power saving state is present, for example, displaying “power saving” on the display unit of the liquid crystal display device as in the above means 4. This makes it possible for the player to grasp that the problem has not occurred, and to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem.

  Means 5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the liquid crystal display device in the power saving state on a regular or random basis (a screen saver is activated).

  If the gaming machine is not used for a long time with the power saving notification display informing that it is in the power saving state, such as displaying “power saving” on the display unit of the liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal panel will be burned out. Is a problem. In this regard, according to the means 5, the occurrence of the malfunction can be suppressed.

  In the case of “displaying a predetermined image in a random manner”, a random number generated in a predetermined control device can be used. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, random number update processing is always performed due to the characteristics of gaming machines that perform various lotteries, so that the above processing is performed like a personal computer by using this. Therefore, there is no need to bother generating random numbers, and the processing can be simplified.

  Means 6. The gaming machine according to any one of means 3 to 5, further comprising a shielding member capable of shielding a display portion of the liquid crystal display device in the power saving state.

  According to the means 6, even when the display unit is completely turned off without performing the power saving notification display as in the means 4 or the image operation display as in the means 5 during power saving, the player is in trouble. The occurrence of problems such as misunderstandings and burn-in of the liquid crystal panel can be reduced.

  Mean 7 In the power saving state, when a predetermined return condition is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined detection signal is input from a predetermined detection means), the power saving state is terminated, and a predetermined portion is displayed on the display unit of the liquid crystal display device. The gaming machine according to any one of means 3 to 6, wherein a demonstration display is executed.

  During the power saving state, the player cannot grasp the effect performed on the display device, but according to the above means 7, for example, the user can grasp the contents of the effect performed on the display device only by touching a predetermined operation means or the like. can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

When starting the demonstration display, a series of demonstration displays may be displayed from the beginning or may be displayed from the middle.
For example, “When a predetermined time has elapsed without performing a new display effect since the end of various display effects in the display unit of the liquid crystal display device, regardless of whether or not it is in a power saving state, When the display control means according to the liquid crystal display device starts the display control process according to the demonstration display and is not in the power saving state, the demonstration display is displayed on the display unit, and when the power saving state is in effect, The demonstration display may not be displayed on the display unit ”. Further, in such a configuration, “when the power saving state is released, the demonstration display in which the control processing has already been executed in the display control means is displayed on the display unit in the middle” may be adopted. .

  Further, “in the power saving state, when a predetermined return condition is satisfied, the power saving state is terminated, and a display image displayed before the power saving state is temporarily displayed on the display unit of the liquid crystal display device is displayed. The demonstration display may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Means 8. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7, wherein the lighting means in the power saving state performs predetermined lighting control or blinking control periodically or randomly.

  According to the means 8, the same effect as that of the means 4 can be obtained.

  Means 9. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8, further comprising return means for ending the power saving state and returning to a normal state when a predetermined return condition is satisfied in the power saving state.

  According to the means 9, by providing the return means, it is possible to improve convenience for a game store or a player.

  Here, the “return condition” is satisfied by, for example, “when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power saving state is reached”, “when a predetermined detection signal is input from a predetermined detection means (from the management device of the amusement store). Including the input of an instruction signal).

Means 10. Comprising a return operation means for ending the power saving state and returning to a normal state;
The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the return condition is established by operating the return operation means.

  According to the means 10, the player or the store clerk or the like can end the power saving state by his / her own operation without being based on an instruction from the management computer or the like of the game store, thereby further improving convenience. Can do. The “return operation means” includes, for example, a launch handle, an effect button, and the like. Of course, a dedicated button or the like may be provided.

Means 11. A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
At least one light emitting means;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a power saving means for setting the light emitting means to a power saving state in which the light emitting means is dimmed or extinguished,
A gaming machine comprising a return means for ending the power saving state and returning to a normal state when a predetermined return condition is satisfied in the power saving state.

  According to the means 11, the same operational effects as the means 1 and means 9 (excluding the effect of the switching operation means) are exhibited. Therefore, regarding the configuration related to the power saving state, the same configuration as the above-described units 3 to 6 and 8 can be subordinated to the configuration of the unit 11.

Means 12. Comprising a return operation means for ending the power saving state and returning to a normal state;
The gaming machine according to claim 11, wherein the return condition is satisfied by operating the return operation means.

  According to the means 11, the same effect as that of the means 10 is obtained.

  Means 13. The gaming machine according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the return means is configured to be able to return from the power saving state to the normal state in a stepwise manner.

  For example, in the case where a player touches a gaming machine to check the game contents but actually does not play a game in the gaming machine, it is inefficient to cancel and restore the entire power saving state. For example, if the player is only to confirm the game contents, only a part of the power saving state such as a display device may be canceled and restored. In this regard, according to the present means, the occurrence of such a problem can be suppressed by adopting a configuration that can be restored in stages, such as by releasing and restoring the power saving state part by part.

Means 14. As the light emitting means, a display device having a predetermined display unit,
Any of the means 11 to 13, wherein when a predetermined return condition is satisfied in the power saving state, the power saving state is terminated, and a predetermined demonstration display is executed on the display unit of the display device. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the means 14, the same effect as that of the means 7 is achieved.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  A. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A ball ball game machine including a game area where a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general prize opening, variable prize winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

  B. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the above ball game machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

  C. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). A spinning-type gaming machine configured to be given game value on condition that the information is specific identification information.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 18 ... Handle, 42 ... Decorative design display device, 42a ... Display part, 57 ... Center lamp, 58, 59 ... Side lamp, 102 ... Side lamp, 103 ... Top lamp, 104 ... Corner lamp, 261 ... Main control device, 451 ... touch sensor, 560 ... sub-control device, LG1 ... frame lamp group, LG2 ... panel lamp group, SW ... volume power saving changeover switch.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
At least one light emitting means;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a power saving means for setting the light emitting means to a power saving state in which the light emitting means is dimmed or extinguished,
A gaming machine comprising a return means for ending the power saving state and returning to a normal state when a predetermined return condition is satisfied in the power saving state.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the return means is configured to be able to return from the power saving state to the normal state in a stepwise manner.

Images